Cs2 Manual De Servicio Ingles

REGIUS CONSOLE

CS-2 INSTALLATION / SERVICE MANUAL CODE NO. 0801

3RD. EDITION FEB. 2005

No. 26-2, Nishishinjuku 1-chome, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 163-0512, Japan

Precautions for CS-2 Installation & Service......................................................................... 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Precautions for installing and servicing the CS-2 ........................................................................... 1 Precautions against electric shock ................................................................................................. 1 Precautions for installing the CS-2 ................................................................................................. 2 Checks and cautions before use of the CS-2 ................................................................................. 2 Precautions for handling the CS-2 LCD panel................................................................................ 2 Precautions for storage location and method of the CS-2 when the use is suspended ................. 3

Alert Symbol Marks ................................................................................................................ 4 Other Symbol Marks............................................................................................................... 5 Warning Notices (Signal Words)........................................................................................... 6

1. Overview 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.7 1.7.1

Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 1-1 CS-2 ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Bar code reader (Single-Bar code reader) (option) ........................................................................ 1-2 Bar code reader <Multi-Bar code reader> (option) ......................................................................... 1-3 List of Optional Licenses..................................................................................................................... 1-4 Equipment Used ................................................................................................................................. 1-5 CS-2 Control Unit (Front View) ....................................................................................................... 1-5 CS-2 Control Unit (Rear View)........................................................................................................ 1-6 CS-2 Operation Unit (Interior)......................................................................................................... 1-7 CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)................................................................................................... 1-8 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View) ................................................................................................... 1-9 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View) ................................................................................................... 1-9 Functions of CS-2 ............................................................................................................................. 1-10 1-to-1 & n-to-m connections ......................................................................................................... 1-10 Post-registration (manual, auto and pre-registration [bar code registration]) ............................... 1-11 Job Manager (JM)......................................................................................................................... 1-12 Dependence relationships for n-to-m connections ....................................................................... 1-13 Optional Functions........................................................................................................................ 1-14 Setting the Host Name & IP Address................................................................................................ 1-15 Setting the Host Name (PC name) ............................................................................................... 1-15 Setting the IP Address .................................................................................................................. 1-15 Example of System Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-17 System-1 (standard 1-to-1 connection) ........................................................................................ 1-17 System-2 (n-to-m connection) ...................................................................................................... 1-18 Service Tool Screens........................................................................................................................ 1-20 Service Tool Screens.................................................................................................................... 1-20

2. Installing the CS-2 2.1 Installation Flow .................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.2 Checks Prior to Installation ................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 System Condition............................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Network Condition .......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 CS-2 Operation Unit ....................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation.............................................................................................. 2-4

3. Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2 3.1 Unpacking........................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 CS-2 Control Unit............................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1.2 CS-2 Operation Unit ....................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Assembling ......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Connecting Cables ........................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.2.2 Attaching the up flow vent............................................................................................................... 3-3 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

I

3.2.3

Attaching the stand for vertical installation ..................................................................................... 3-4

4. Setting Up the CS-2 Operation Unit 4.1 Setting the Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Checking the Factory Default Status .............................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Installing the Touch Panel Software .............................................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume............................................................................................................. 4-7

5. Upgrading the CS-2 Program 5.1

Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM ....................................................................................................... 5-1

6. Connecting a CS-2 and REGIUS 170 6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection .......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Network Setting of REGIUS 170..................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.2 Setting up the CS-2 ........................................................................................................................ 6-7 6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection ...................................................................................................... 6-21 6.2.1 Setting Up the REGIUS 170 ......................................................................................................... 6-22 6.2.2 Setting up the Standard JM on the CS-2 ...................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.3 Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2............................................................................................ 6-44

7. Setting Up the System 7.1 Connecting a luminance meter ........................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Connecting to the Network ................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.2.1 Connecting the CS-2 to a Network ................................................................................................. 7-2 7.2.2 Connecting the REGIUS 170 to a Network..................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.3 Verifying the Network Connection .................................................................................................. 7-2 7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3.1 Assembling and Connecting the Bar Code Reader (Single)........................................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Connecting the Bar Code Reader (multiple)................................................................................... 7-7

8.Setting Up the CS-2 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2

Calibrating the Touch Panel ............................................................................................................... 8-1 Backing Up the Original Settings ........................................................................................................ 8-4 Setting the System Properties ............................................................................................................ 8-6 Setting the Facility/Device Properties ............................................................................................. 8-6 Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer)........................................................................... 8-7 Setting the System Configuration (RIS).......................................................................................... 8-8 Setting the appointment information ............................................................................................... 8-9 Setting the Initial Screen................................................................................................................. 8-9 Setting Density and Contrast Adjustment Amount........................................................................ 8-10 Setting the Printer Information .......................................................................................................... 8-12 Setting the Host Information ............................................................................................................. 8-16 Setting the RIS Information............................................................................................................... 8-22 Setting Patient/Study .................................................................................................................... 8-22 Setting the Result ......................................................................................................................... 8-26 Setting the Stamps ........................................................................................................................... 8-31 Configuring the Gateway .................................................................................................................. 8-35 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product ........................................................................................ 8-36 Maker/Product Relation Table ...................................................................................................... 8-36 Patient Information Linkage .......................................................................................................... 8-36

9. Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit II

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.6

Required Items ................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Preparation ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Measuring the display brightness characteristics ............................................................................... 9-1 Creating the Monitor LUT ................................................................................................................... 9-4 Confirmation ....................................................................................................................................... 9-6 Restoring test image...................................................................................................................... 9-6 Checking Gradation on the host output .......................................................................................... 9-6 Checking Gradation in Printer Output............................................................................................. 9-8 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)................................................................................... 9-9

10. Verifying and Backing Up Setup Data 10.1 Checking the Image.......................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data............................................................................................................. 10-6 10.2.1 Backing Up the Reader Set Up Data ............................................................................................ 10-6 10.2.2 Back Up of CS-2 Set Up Data ...................................................................................................... 10-7 10.2.3 Deleting the Image Data ............................................................................................................... 10-9

11. Adjustment of Cassette Readers 11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size ........................................................................................... 11-1 11.1.1 Checking Image Size, Read Start Position................................................................................... 11-1 11.1.2 Adjusting PLL, Read Start Position............................................................................................... 11-4 11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette................................................................................... 11-6 11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette....................................................................................... 11-9

12. Maintenance & Adjustment 12.1 Regular Service Items ...................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information ...................................................................................... 12-2 12.2.1 Back Up of System Information .................................................................................................... 12-2 12.2.2 Restore of System Information ..................................................................................................... 12-4 12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information .............................................................................................. 12-6 12.3.1 Back Up of System Information .................................................................................................... 12-6 12.3.2 Restore of JM Information ............................................................................................................ 12-7 12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2......................................................................................................... 12-8 12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170 .......................................................................................... 12-11 12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit ........................................................................... 12-15 12.6.1 Adjusting the Brightness ............................................................................................................. 12-15 12.7 Calibrating the Touch Panel ........................................................................................................... 12-16 12.7.1 Calibration................................................................................................................................... 12-16 12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM ..................................................................................... 12-17 12.8.1 Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM................................................................................. 12-17 12.8.2 Switch Over to Standard JM ....................................................................................................... 12-19

13. Disassembly & Assembly 13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and Connector ........................................................................... 13-1 13.2 Removing the Cover ......................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.3 Component ....................................................................................................................................... 13-2 13.3.1 Component Position .................................................................................................................... 13-2 13.3.2 Access to System Board Components and Drive........................................................................ 13-2 13.4 Identifying System Board Parts ........................................................................................................ 13-4 13.5 Attaching Memory............................................................................................................................. 13-5 13.5.1 Attaching DIMM ........................................................................................................................... 13-5 13.6 Replacing the Battery ....................................................................................................................... 13-6 13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive ....................................................................................... 13-7

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

III

13.8 13.9 13.10 13.11 13.12

Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD Optical Disk Drive .......................................... 13-8 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................ 13-9 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive .................................................................................. 13-10 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive ........................................................................................ 13-11 Connecting IDE Drive .................................................................................................................... 13-12

14. Troubleshooting 14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application ............................................................................................ 14-1 14.1.1 Errors relating to hardware and software...................................................................................... 14-1 14.1.2 Errors relating to communication (Viewer/Server/Printer/External patient/Examination DB)........ 14-2 14.1.3 Error relating to output queue control ........................................................................................... 14-3 14.1.4 External patient/Examination DB-related error ............................................................................. 14-3 14.1.5 Errors relating to reading ............................................................................................................. 14-4 14.1.6 Errors relating to REGIUS 170 ..................................................................................................... 14-4 14.1.7 Errors relating to printer ................................................................................................................ 14-5 14.2 Collecting the Logs ........................................................................................................................... 14-8 14.2.1 Collecting the Application Logs..................................................................................................... 14-8 14.2.2 .........................................................................................................Collecting the System Logs14-10 14.2.3 Collecting the Reader Logs ........................................................................................................ 14-12 14.2.4 Back Up of JM Logs.................................................................................................................... 14-17 14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)........................................................................ 14-19

15. Service Tool Screens 15.1 Service Tool Overview ...................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.1 Alternative of Starting the Service Tool ........................................................................................ 15-1 15.1.2 Summary of the Service Tool Screens ......................................................................................... 15-2 15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...] ................................................................................................... 15-5 15.2.1 “General Setup” Common Screen ................................................................................................ 15-5 15.2.2 “General Setup” Screen ・ General ............................................................................................... 15-5 15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics] ... 15-7 15.3.1 “QA Tool Column Edit” Screen ..................................................................................................... 15-7 15.3.2 Configure Tool .............................................................................................................................. 15-8 15.3.3 “Study List (Column Heading)” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-10 15.3.4 Image Confirmation screen Editing Tool screen......................................................................... 15-12 15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]............................................................................................................... 15-14 15.4.1 “SYSTEM INFO” Screen............................................................................................................. 15-14 15.4.2 “SYSTEM INFO • Institution Info.” Screen .................................................................................. 15-14 15.4.3 “SYSTEM INFO • REGIUS Info.” Screen.................................................................................... 15-15 15.4.4 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Reader)” Screen .............................................................................. 15-16 15.4.5 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Host, Printer)” Screen ...................................................................... 15-17 15.4.6 “SYSTEM INFO • System (RIS)” Screen .................................................................................... 15-18 15.4.7 “SYSTEM INFO • (Option)” Screen ............................................................................................ 15-19 15.4.8 “SYSTEM INFO • Order Info.” Screen ........................................................................................ 15-20 15.4.9 “SYSTEM INFO • Study Info.” Screen ........................................................................................ 15-21 15.4.10 “SYSTEM INFO • Timeout” Screen ............................................................................................ 15-22 15.4.11 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <User>” Screen............................................................................. 15-23 15.4.12 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <Service>” Screen ........................................................................ 15-24 15.4.13 “SYSTEM INFO • Output Priority” Screen .................................................................................. 15-25 15.4.14 “SYSTEM INFO • Log Level “ Screen......................................................................................... 15-26 15.4.15 “SYSTEM INFO • My Network” Screen ...................................................................................... 15-27 15.4.16 “SYSTEM INFO • HIPAA” Screen............................................................................................... 15-28 15.4.17 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Filliping Mark” display .................................................................................... 15-29 15.4.18 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Remote Maintenance” display ....................................................................... 15-30 15.4.19 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Image Sharing” display.................................................................................. 15-31 15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager].............................................................................................................. 15-32 15.5.1 “JOBM INFO • Job Manager Info.” Screen ................................................................................. 15-32

IV

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.5.2 “JOBM INFO • Back to Standard” Screen .................................................................................. 15-33 15.6 [Console] > [Printer] ........................................................................................................................ 15-34 15.6.1 Common Display of “PRINTER INFO” Screen ........................................................................... 15-34 15.6.2 “PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen........................................................................................ 15-34 15.6.3 “PRINTER INFO • Basic TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................................... 15-35 15.6.4 "PRINTER INFO • Basic DICOM” Screen .................................................................................. 15-36 15.6.5 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen............................................................ 15-37 15.6.6 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen ........................................................... 15-38 15.6.7 “PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen ............................................................................. 15-39 15.6.8 “PRINTER INFO • Output Size” Screen ..................................................................................... 15-40 15.6.9 “PRINTER INFO• Image” Screen ............................................................................................... 15-41 15.6.10 “PRINTER INFO • Output Setting” Screen ................................................................................. 15-42 15.6.11 “PRINTER INFO • Printer“ Screen.............................................................................................. 15-43 15.6.12 “PRINTER INFO • Output Pixel” Screen..................................................................................... 15-44 15.7 [Console] > [Host] ........................................................................................................................... 15-45 15.7.1 Common Settings of “HOST INFO” Screen................................................................................ 15-45 15.7.2 “HOST INFO • Command” Screen ............................................................................................. 15-45 15.7.3 “HOST INFO • C-STORE TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................................. 15-46 15.7.4 “HOST INFO • C-STORE DICOM” Screen ................................................................................. 15-47 15.7.5 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION TCP/IP” Scree .................................................................................. 15-48 15.7.6 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION DICOM” Screen................................................................................ 15-49 15.7.7 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................. 15-50 15.7.8 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen ................................................................. 15-51 15.7.9 “HOST INFO • Image” Screen .................................................................................................... 15-52 15.7.10 “HOST INFO • Output Setting” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-53 15.7.11 “HOST INFO ・ Output Pixel” screen........................................................................................... 15-54 15.8 [Console] > [RIS] ............................................................................................................................ 15-55 15.8.1 Common Settings of “RIS INFO” Screen.................................................................................... 15-55 15.8.2 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen ................................................................................................. 15-55 15.8.3 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (Patient/Study).............................................................................. 15-56 15.8.4 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (Patient/Study) ............................................................................. 15-57 15.8.5 ”RIS INFO • Detached” Screen................................................................................................... 15-58 15.8.6 “RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-59 15.8.7 “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” Screen......................................................................... 15-61 15.8.8 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen (Result) .................................................................................... 15-62 15.8.9 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (result) .......................................................................................... 15-63 15.8.10 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (result) .......................................................................................... 15-64 15.8.11 “RIS INFO • Detached” Screen (result) ...................................................................................... 15-65 15.8.12 “RIS INFO • MPPS” Screen (result)............................................................................................ 15-66 15.9 [Console] > [Density] ...................................................................................................................... 15-67 15.9.1 Common Settings of “MARKER INFO” Screen .......................................................................... 15-67 15.9.2 “MARKER INFO • Overlay Set” Screen ..................................................................................... 15-67 15.9.3 “MARKER INFO • Stamp Position” Screen ................................................................................ 15-68 15.10 [Console] > [Stamp] ........................................................................................................................ 15-69 15.10.1 “Stamp Infomation” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-69 15.10.2 “Stamp Format” Screen .............................................................................................................. 15-70 15.10.3 “Set Stamp” Screen .................................................................................................................... 15-71 15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag] .................................................................................................................. 15-75 15.11.1 "Exam Tag Setup” Screen .......................................................................................................... 15-75 15.11.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/4) ......................................................................................................... 15-77 15.11.3 “Output Device Information” Screen ........................................................................................... 15-78 15.11.4 “Study Parts Select” Screen ....................................................................................................... 15-79 15.11.5 “Detail Setup” Screen (2/4) ......................................................................................................... 15-80 15.11.6 “Detail Setup” Screen (3/4) ......................................................................................................... 15-81 15.11.7 “Process Select” Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-81 15.11.8 Detail Setup screen (4/4) ............................................................................................................ 15-82 15.12 [Console] > [Process] ..................................................................................................................... 15-83 15.12.1 “Process Parameter Setup” Screen............................................................................................ 15-83 15.12.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/5) ......................................................................................................... 15-84 15.12.3 “Detail Setup” Screen (2/5) ......................................................................................................... 15-85 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

V

15.12.4 “Detail Setup” Screen (3/5) ......................................................................................................... 15-86 15.12.5 “Detail Setup” Screen (4/5) ......................................................................................................... 15-87 15.12.6 “Detailed Setting” Screen (5/5) ................................................................................................... 15-88 15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway] ................................................................................................................... 15-89 15.13.1 Gateway to Others main menu screen ....................................................................................... 15-89 15.13.2 MWM Controller Setting screen................................................................................................. 15-90 15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB] ................................................................................................................. 15-92 15.14.1 “Patient DB Import” Screen......................................................................................................... 15-92 15.14.2 “Patient Data Base” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-93 15.14.3 “OK (Test Data Base)” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-94 15.14.4 “Export Patient DB” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-95 15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]]............................................................................................... 15-96 15.15.1 “Install File” Screen..................................................................................................................... 15-96 15.15.2 “Control Program” Screen........................................................................................................... 15-96 15.16 [Console] > [License] ...................................................................................................................... 15-97 15.16.1 License Manager screen ............................................................................................................ 15-97 15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”..................................................................................... 15-98 15.17.1 Common Displays of “CCU INFO” Screen ................................................................................. 15-98 15.17.2 “CCU INFO • TCP/IP” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-98 15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup]............................................................................................................... 15-99 15.18.1 “Device Set” Screen.................................................................................................................... 15-99 15.19 [Reader] > [PCB]........................................................................................................................... 15-101 15.19.1 “REGIUS 170 PCB” Screen...................................................................................................... 15-101 15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current]................................................................................................................ 15-102 15.20.1 “Std. Current” Screen................................................................................................................ 15-102 15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.] ............................................................................................................. 15-103 15.21.1 “Uniformity Corr.” Screen.......................................................................................................... 15-103 15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity].................................................................................................................. 15-105 15.22.1 “Sensitivity Corr.” Screen.......................................................................................................... 15-105 15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs]................................................................................................................... 15-107 15.23.1 “SubSystemLogs Create” Screen............................................................................................ 15-107 15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs] ............................................................................................................. 15-108 15.24.1 Common Displays of “Reader Log Info.” Screen ...................................................................... 15-108 15.24.2 “Reader Log Info.” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-108 15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade] ............................................................................................... 15-109 15.25.1 “Install File” Screen................................................................................................................... 15-109 15.25.2 “Reader Program (change)” Screen ......................................................................................... 15-109 15.26 [Reader] > [Network]..................................................................................................................... 15-110 15.26.1 “Network” screen ...................................................................................................................... 15-110 15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]............................................................................................. 15-111 15.27.1 “System Setup File Save” Screen........................................................................................... 15-111 15.27.2 “Image File Save” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-112 15.27.3 Log Manager screen................................................................................................................. 15-113 15.27.4 “Log File Save” Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-114 15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image] ....................................................................................................... 15-115 15.28.1 “System Setup File Restore” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-115 15.28.2 “Image File Restore” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-116 15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]................................................................................... 15-117 15.29.1 “Brightness” Screen .................................................................................................................. 15-117 15.29.2 “Brightness • Prop. Measure” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-118 15.29.3 “Bright. Adjustment• LUT making for the display” Screen......................................................... 15-119 15.29.4 “Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen............................................................................ 15-120 15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All] ................................................................................... 15-122 15.30.1 “Delete Image” Screen.............................................................................................................. 15-122 15.30.2 “Delete All” Dialogue................................................................................................................. 15-123 15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]................................................. 15-124 15.31.1 “PostgreSQL access” Screen ................................................................................................... 15-124 15.31.2 Back Up of JM Information ....................................................................................................... 15-127

VI

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.31.3 Restore of JM Information ........................................................................................................ 15-127 15.31.4 JM Log Save............................................................................................................................. 15-128 15.31.5 JM Initialize ............................................................................................................................... 15-128 15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping].......................................................................................................................... 15-129 15.32.1 “Network Diagnosis” Screen ..................................................................................................... 15-129 15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool) ................................................................................................... 15-130 15.33.1 “Mainte” Screen ........................................................................................................................ 15-130 15.33.2 “Contrast” Screen ..................................................................................................................... 15-132 15.33.3 “ROI” Screen............................................................................................................................. 15-133 15.33.4 “Histogram” Screen................................................................................................................... 15-133 15.33.5 “Hor. & Ver. Profile” Screen ...................................................................................................... 15-134 15.33.6 “MTF Measurement” Screen..................................................................................................... 15-135 15.33.7 “Measure: S Sensitivity Measure” Screen ................................................................................ 15-136 15.33.8 “Measure: Corrected Mural Measure” Screen .......................................................................... 15-137 15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log] .................................................................................................. 15-138 15.34.1 “Application Log” Screen .......................................................................................................... 15-138 15.34.2 “Search” Screen........................................................................................................................ 15-139 15.34.3 “System Log Info.” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-140

16. Appendix 16.1 List of Differences ............................................................................................................................. 16-1 16.1.1 Service Tool.................................................................................................................................. 16-1 16.1.2 Function ........................................................................................................................................ 16-3 16.2 Stamp Item Selection List ................................................................................................................. 16-6 16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table ...................................................................................... 16-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

VII

VIII

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

PRECAUTIONS FOR CS-2 INSTALLATION & SERVICE Observe the precautions below before starting installation or maintenance service.

1. Precautions for installing and servicing the CS-2 • Only properly trained and authorized service personnel can install and service the CS-2 in order to prevent risk of injury.

• When servicing the CS-2, which may cause vibration to the device, wait for 30 seconds or more after the • • • • •

shutdown to start servicing. When an access close to the moving parts, such as fan is required in servicing, take great precautions not to get injured from the part of body or clothes being caught by the fan. The electric circuit in the CS-2 may be damaged by static electricity. The main body and any electrical parts removed should be handled with due care during servicing. An anti-static wristband should always be worn when handling circuit boards. Before removing or replacing internal circuit boards, or disconnecting connectors or cables, the CS-2 power supply must be switched off. Carrying out the disassembling or assembling with the power on will result in serious injury and must always be avoided. Operation and adjustment of the device in a way other than described in this manual may cause emission of hazardous electromagnetic waves and must always avoided. Follow the description in the caution labels to ensure servicing is performed appropriately and safely.

• • Do not allow the user to remove the outer covers of the device. 2. Precautions against electric shock • Precautions against high voltage

The CS-2 contains a high voltage power supply. Observe the following precautions to avoid electric shock. Touching the high voltage supply parts of the device after removing covers may cause electric shock.

• Precautions against power supply Maximum 100VAC is supplied to the devices that compose the CS-2. Observe the following precautions to avoid electric shock.

• Install the devices in a place where they are not exposed to water. • Check that the devices are well grounded. • Make sure that all the cables are connected correctly and are not damaged

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1

3. Precautions for installing the CS-2 • Install the CS-2 in a place where it is not exposed to water. • Store in the location where there is no likelihood of being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, • • • • • • • •

temperature, humidity, airflow, direct sunlight, air containing dust, salt or sulfur, etc. Do not install the CS-2 directly on the floor. Store in a flat place where it is free from vibration or shock. Do not store in a place for chemical storage or in a place where a gas may evolve. Do not use any power outlet other than that whose voltage and frequency complies with the specification of the CS-2. Use the power outlet that has a well sufficient electric capacity to match the power consumption of the CS-2. Power cable and communication cable shall be connected to the CS-2 to operate. Lay the cables neatly to avoid to trip over and to accidentally disconnect them. Make sure that the power cable is properly plugged in the power outlet that has an independent grounding. In case if the power outlet has no independent grounding terminal, use an additional grounding terminal and secure the connection. CS-2 has an air inlet and outlet in order to prevent the temperature from rising in the device. Do not block the air inlet and outlet. Installing the CS-2 close to the device that is not complying with EMC, it may cause malfunction.

• • Do not install the CS-2 in the environment where the patient can easily access the device.

4. Checks and cautions before use of the CS-2 • Check if the power cable is not damaged. • Check if the earth cable is properly connected. • Check if all the cables are connected correctly and not loose. • Check if there is no fracture or crack on the LCD of the CS-2 Operation Unit. • Check if the CS-2 operates stably and without failure. • CS-2 has an air inlet and outlet in order to prevent the temperature from rising in the device. Do not block the air inlet and outlet.

5. Precautions for handling the CS-2 LCD panel • Operate the touch panel of the CS-2 Operation Unit with fingers. Do not use a sharp-pointed object, such • •

2

as a pen, as it will crack or damage the touch panel. Because the LCD is made of glass, do not apply a physical force to the LCD. If the touch panel is broken, and the liquid inside it is leaked, do not put it into your mouth. If the liquid is put on the part of your body or clothes, immediately wash it off in soapy water. If cracking or breakage occurs on the touch panel, immediately stop using it. Never use it when the touch panel is damaged.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6. Precautions for storage location and method of the CS-2 when the use is suspended • Turn the power OFF in the specified procedure. • When disconnecting cables, hold the cables correctly to remove them. • Observe the following precautions for storage location. • Store in the location where the unit will not be exposed to water. • Store in the location where there is no likelihood of being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, airflow, direct sunlight, air containing dust, salt or sulfur, etc.

• Store in a flat place where it is free from vibration or shock. • Do not store in a place for chemical storage or in a place where a gas may evolve. • Keep all accessories, cables, etc., neatly in the storage location after cleaning them. • Be sure to clean them not to cause any trouble when it is used for the next time. 7. Precautions in operating the CS-2 after an extended period of non-use • • • • • • •

Check if there is no damage on the power cable. Make sure that the device well grounded. Make sure that all the cables are connected correctly and firmly. Check if there is no fracture or crack on the LCD of the CS-2 Operation Unit. Check if the CS-2 operates stably and without failure. Using the device with other X-ray device at the same time may result in an incorrect diagnosis or hazardous to people. So, extreme care should be taken. CS-2 has an air inlet and outlet in order to prevent the temperature from rising in the device. Do not block the air inlet and outlet.

8. Ethernet Port • Do not connect other cable than Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port. • Do not use the Ethernet port for the connection to the telephone line. 9. Precautions when disposing of the product and packing materials. When disposing of the product and packing materials, follow the local ordinance and regulations and request the authorized industrial waste disposal operator.

10. About the device names listed in this manual. The reader name “REGIUS 170” or “REGIUS 190” in this manual means both “REGIUS 170” and “REGIUS 190” when the paragraph or the procedure is common to both readers.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

3

ALERT SYMBOL MARKS Safety Alert Symbol This is the industry "Safety Alert Symbol". This symbol draws your attention to items and operations associated with the use of this equipment that could result in danger to yourself and others. Please read all messages next to alert symbol marks, and follow the directions very carefully. Before assembling or using this equipment, it is important that you read the instructions and safety standards.

4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

OTHER SYMBOL MARKS The following table defines the symbol marks used on the equipment and in this manual. No.

Symbol

Meaning of Symbol

1

Danger, Warning or Note. Read the description that bears this symbol.

2

Compulsory symbol. Must observe the instruction.

3

Alternating current

4

Protective earth (ground)

5

OFF (power: disconnection from the mains)

6

ON (power: connection to the mains)

7

Standby ON/OFF (The main power source will still be ON even when this is turned OFF.)

8

Dangerous voltage. (Indicates that high voltage is used.)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

5

WARNING NOTICES (SIGNAL WORDS) • Signal words provide an indication of the degree of danger concealed within the product. • This manual uses three different signal words depending on the probability and severity of injury or damage as explained below. DANGER

Indicates an acute hazard that will result in death or serious injury if not avoided.

WARNING

Indicates a danger that may result in death or serious injury if not avoided.

CAUTION

Indicates a danger that may result in medium-level wound or minor injury if not avoided. It is also used to indicate anticipation of a danger of physical damage only.

Probability of damage

Bodily injury and (damage to equipment)

High

Low

Death or serious injury (serious damage)

DANGER

WARNING

Medium-level wound or minor injury (minor damage)

WARNING or CAUTION

CAUTION

Physical damage only

6

CAUTION

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1

Overview

This page intentionally left blank.

1.1 Specifications

1.1 Specifications 1.1.1

CS-2 Product Name Code no. Image processing Memory for Image Storage I/O Port

REGIUS Console CS-2 0801 Automatic gray-scale processing, frequency processing,equalization processing, hybrid processing 20 GB or more Ethernet 10base-T/100baseTX/1000base-T (Standard X 1))

Image Output Host

Normal 1ch, Backup 1ch

Printer

Normal 1ch, Backup 1ch

DICOM support

Storage(CR/DX, SCU), Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU, Modality Worklist Management SCU, Modality Performed Procedure Step SCU

Operational Condition Transport/Storage Condition

15 ~ 30°C/40 ~ 80RH% (no condensation) −40 ∼ 60°C/5 ∼ 100ΡΗ% (no condensation)

Accessories

Control Unit power cable, Operation unit power cable, Control Unit/ Operation Unitconnecting cable (several), Keyboard, Mouse x 1, Operation manual

Option

Barcode reader for cassette registration (single/multi), CS-2 MWM/ FTP/DETATCH Option, CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option, CS-2 HQ Mammography Option, CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1, CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #2, CS-2 DICOM Output Package, CS-2 Stitching Option, CS-2 Image Sharing Option, CS-2 Data Analysis Option

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1-1

1.1 Specifications

1.1.2

Bar code reader (Single-Bar code reader) (option) Bar code reader unit Product name Interface

BH2104 - K01 USB Ver. 1.1

Light source

Visible Laser Diode 650nm

Laser class

Conforms to CDRH Class II

Readable code

Code 128

Maximum read distance

190 mm

Minimum resolution

0.13 mm

Dead Zone

+/- 6 degrees of beam axis.

Power supply voltage

4.5 ~ 5.5 VDC (voltage at connector)

Current consumption

Normal Operation : Max. 350 mA (5.5VDC) Ave. 130 mA Standby : Max.50 mA

Generated Heat Resistance to Shock

Max. 1.75 W Ave. 0.65 W Normal reading is secured even after it is dropped from 1.5m height. (with cable, after 10 drops on the plastic tile floor at random angle)

Operating Life

MTBF 240,000H (operation in 40: atmosphere)

Ambient Luminance

Artificial Light : 450ft. -candles (4842 lx.) Sunlight : 10,000ft. -candles (107,600 lx.)

Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity Dimensions Weight Cable length

0 ~ 50°C -40 ~ 60°C 5 ~ 95%RH (no condensation) 63(W) x 84(D) x 152(H) mm 146g (without cable.) 1.7m (with connectors)

Stand Product name Dimensions Weight

1-2

BS9019 - K01 151(W) x 170(D) x 250(H) mm (without projected parts) 193g

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.1 Specifications

Scanning Angle(in the case of Security Level 2)

Pitch Angle : +/- 30 degrees

Roll Angle : +/- 15 degrees

+a

Ske w Angle : +/- 50 degrees

-a

+B -B

1.1.3

-y

+y

Bar code reader <Multi-Bar code reader> (option) Product name Interface Light Source Laser Class Readable Code

MS 7120 Orbit USB Visible Laser Diode Conforms to CDRH Class IIa Code 128

Max. Readable Length

130mm

Resolution

0.13mm

Power Source

5.2 VDC

Current Consumption Resistance to Shock Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Conditions Humidity Dimensions Weight Cable Length

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

220mA Normal reading is secured even after it is dropped on the concrete ground from 1.0m height. 0 ~ 40°C -40 ~ 60°C 5 ~ 95%RH (no condensation) 80(W) x 105(D) x 150(H) mm 380g (without cable.) 2.1m (with connectors)

1-3

1.2 List of Optional Licenses

1.2 List of Optional Licenses IMPORTANT In the following settings, only those functions for which the license has been purchased should be set to “ON”. Never set the function for which the license is not purchased to “ON”. Required license

Function

CS-2 MWM/FTP/DETATCH Option

To acquire the patient info or exam info from the External patient/Exam DB.

CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option

To send the exam result to the External patient/Exam DB.

CS-2 HQ Mammography Option

To read the mammogram at the resolution of 43.75µm.

CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1

To output the image to two destinations. (only either to viewer/server or printer with the Standard License)

CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #2

To output the image to three destinations. (essential to agreed to the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1 license)

CS-2 DICOM Output Package

To output the image to three destinations. (not essential to agree to the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1)

CS-2 Stitching Option

To stitch images of long object read on the REGIUS 190/170)

CS-2 Image Sharing Option

To browse the exam history of other CS-2s.

CS-2 Data Analysis Option

To register or output the exam-related data that is controlled by the CS-2.

1-4

Product Code (Displayed on the screen)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.3 Equipment Used

1.3 Equipment Used 1.3.1

CS-2 Control Unit (Front View)

1. CD-RW drive 2. Hard disk drive activity indicator 3. Power ON indicator 4. Power button 5. USB connector (x2) 6. Microphone connector (line input) 7. Head phone connector (line output) 8. Diskette drive

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1-5

1.3 Equipment Used

1.3.2

CS-2 Control Unit (Rear View)

1. Power code connector 2. Cable lock latch 3. Rope clip (U-shaped bolt) hole 4. PCI adaptor slot 5. Serial connector (x2) 6. Ethernet connector 7. USB connector (x2) 8. VGA monitor connector 9. Parallel connector 10. Audio line input connector 11. Audio line output connector (light green) 12. USB connector (x4) 13. PS/2 keyboard connector 14. PS/2 mouse connector

1-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.3 Equipment Used

1.3.3

CS-2 Operation Unit (Interior)

1. Diskette drive lock 2. DIMM (memory) connector (x2) 3. Battery 4. PCI riser 5. Power supply assembly 6. CD-RW drive (the HDD is under the CD drive) 7. CD or DVD drive lock

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1-7

1.3 Equipment Used

1.3.4

CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)

Control panel

1. Screen Manager 2. Speaker Sound volume

Use the left/right control button to adjust volume

Noise reduction

Use the left/right control button to display the sound volume adjustment menu and hold down the up or down control button. To delete, press the left or right control button.

3. Input switch button 4. Auto button 5. Enter button 6. Control buttons (left/down/up/right) 7. Power switch 8. Power lamp

1-8

Blue

Operation mode

Yellow flashes twice

Saving mode

Yellow flashes slowly

Power off

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.3 Equipment Used

1.3.5

CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View)

1. Stand attachment holes 2. Anti-theft lock 3. Stand (detachable)

1.3.6

CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View)

1. Power connector 2. USB port (upstream) 3. Audio input terminal 4. DVI-D connector (SIGNAL 1) 5. D-SUB15 pin connector (mini) (SIGNAL 2)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1-9

1.4 Functions of CS-2

1.4 Functions of CS-2 CS-2 is a console newly developed for controlling the REGIUS MODEL 170 (REGIUS 170), which was created for the practitioner market. CS-2 features intuitive and simple operation and auto-learning capabilities for image processing parameters. After acquiring a detailed understanding of the capabilities of CS-2, you must be able to configure various systems for specific purposes.

1.4.1

1-to-1 & n-to-m connections The simplest configuration is one in which the CS-2 is connected to one REGIUS 170 and the CS-2 functions as a controller exclusively for that device. This type of configuration is denoted as a “1-to-1” connection in this manual. Several 1-to-1 connections can be used on the same network. In this case, however, unlike an n-to-m connection (described below), the CS-2 can control only the REGIUS 170 in a 1-to-1 connection. 1-to-1

1-to-1

CS-2 #1

CS-2 #2

External patient/ exam DB

Printer Viewer/Server REGIUS 170 #1

REGIUS 170 #2 Read image Network

On the other hand, a configuration where two CS-2 and two REGIUS 170s are connected with one network and each CS-2 shares the REGIUS 170s is called an n-to-m connection. This includes configurations in which one CS-2 is connected to two REGIUS 170s and two CS-2s are connected to one REGIUS 170.

n-to-m CS-2 #1

CS-2 #2

External patient/ exam DB

Printer Viewer/Server REGIUS 170 #1

REGIUS 170 #2

Read image Network

1 - 10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.4 Functions of CS-2

For reasons related to system characteristics, RIS/IDS and Host, which are described as external I/O devices in the CS-1 manual, are denoted as follows in the CS-2 manual:

• RIS/IDS → External patient/Examination DB • Host → Viewer/Server However, because of compatibility between the CS-2 and CS-1 Service Tools, the words "RIS/IDS" and "Host" may appear in some tools.

1.4.2

Post-registration (manual, auto and pre-registration [bar code registration]) 1-to-1 connections

Cassette images taken by a REGIUS 170 are always sent to one CS-2. Therefore, the CS-2 defines the association between sent images and X-rayed body parts. This is called post-registration. In addition, if Xrayed body parts are not pre-registered, when a cassette is inserted in the REGIUS 170 and an X-rayed part is issued it is called autoregistration.

n-to-m connections

If which image corresponds to which X-rayed part is not defined beforehand, the image could be sent to the wrong CS-2. For that reason, the CS-2 uses a bar code reader to read bar code information on the cassette before X-raying (or input) and registers the X-rayed part that is associated with the image. When the cassette is input, the bar code read by the REGIUS 170 and the one registered by the CS-2 are compared and it is determined which image is sent to the CS-2. This method is called pre-registration.

• The post-registration and auto-registration methods do not use the bar code reader.

• n-to-m systems must use the pre-registration method. • Either post-registration or auto-registration can be used with a 1-to-1 system.The default is post-registration. Depending on the operation method in the facility, it may be switched to autoregistration. Pre-registration is not normally used.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 11

1.4 Functions of CS-2

1.4.3

Job Manager (JM) Job Manager (JM) associates the aforementioned cassette bar code and X-rayed body parts through communication between a CS-2 and REGIUS 170. JM is incorporated in the CS-2 and JM runs on the CS-2 and, regardless of which connection method is used (1-to-1 or n-to-m), is an essential component of systems that include a CS-2 and REGIUS 170. For a 1-to-1 connection, JM runs on all CS-2s. For a n-to-m connection, the standard JM runs on one CS-2 and a backup JM runs on other CS-2s. Normally, all CS-2s and the REGIUS 170 use the standard JM. The backup JM is used only when there is trouble with the standard JM.

External patient/ exam DB

1-to-1

1-to-1

1-to-1

CS-2 #1

CS-2 #2

CS-2 #3

REGIUS 170 #1

REGIUS 170 #2

CS-2 #1 JM External patient/ exam DB

1 - 12

REGIUS 170 #1

REGIUS 170 #3

Printer Viewer/ Server

CS-2 #2 Backup JM

REGIUS 170 #2

Printer Viewer/ Server

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.4 Functions of CS-2

1.4.4

Dependence relationships for n-to-m connections In a 1-to-1 connection, turning off the CS-2 automatically puts the REGIUS 170 in standby. With an n-to-m connection system, since two CS-2s share one REGIUS 170, even if one CS-2 quits, in some cases the REGIUS 170 cannot enter standby status. To implement this, it is possible to define the dependence relationship for power control between the CS-2s and the REGIUS 170. For example, as shown in the figure below, CS-2 #1 is associated with REGIUS 170 #1 and #2 for power control, while CS-2 #2 is associated with REGIUS 170 #2.

CS-2 #1, JM Ser. no. 0025

CS-2 #2, JM Ser. no. 0026

REGIUS 170 #1 Ser. no. 0025

REGIUS 170 #2 Ser. no. 0025

Power ON/OFF association Error information association

In this configuration, terminating the system software on CS-2 #1 alone automatically places REGIUS 170 #1 in standby. In the same way, terminating CS-2 #2 alone does not place either REGIUS 170 in standby. Since REGIUS 170 #2 is associated with both CS-2s, if either CS-2 starts up, it automatically becomes operating status and when both CS-2s quit, it enters standby. This relationship can also be used to handle error messages so that errors that occur on a specific REGIUS 170 can be sent to a specific CS-2. In the above example, errors that occur on REGIUS 170 #1 are only sent to CS-2 #1 and errors that occur on REGIUS 170 #2 are only sent to CS-2 #2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 13

1.4 Functions of CS-2

1.4.5

Optional Functions Separate license will be necessary to implement a connection or to use the functions listed below. Check whether the license has been purchased before implementing the connection. • To acquire the patient info or exam info from the External patient/ Exam DB. Required license CS-2 MWM/FTP/DETATCH Option

• To send the exam result to the External patient/Exam DB. Required license CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option

• To read the mammogram at the resolution of 43.75µm. Required license CS-2 HQ Mammography Option

• To output the image to two destinations. (only either to viewer/ server or printer with the Standard License) Required license CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1

• To output the image to three destinations. (essential to agreed to the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1 license) Required license CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #2

• To output the image to three destinations. (not essential to agree to the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1) Required license CS-2 DICOM Output Package

• To stitch images of long object read on the REGIUS 190/170) Required license CS-2 Stitching Option

• To browse the exam history of other CS-2s. Required license CS-2 Image Sharing Option

• To register or output the exam-related data that is controlled by the CS-2. Required license CS-2 Data Analysis Option

1 - 14

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.5 Setting the Host Name & IP Address

1.5 Setting the Host Name & IP Address In TCP/IP networks, all devices connected to the network need an individual host name (PC name) and IP address. The network IP address and host name must be unique. In the factory default, CS-2 uses a fixed IP address and unique host name, as does the REGIUS 170. The CS-2 and REGIUS 170 are set to the post-registration method by default. If your facility does not instruct you otherwise, maintain the factory default 1-to-1 connection. The following is the factory default status: CS-2

REGIUS 170/190

• Host name • IP address • Net mask • Host name • IP address • Net mask

CS2-XXXX XXXX is a serial number 192.168.20.90 255.255.255.0 r170-0001 192.168.20.170 255.255.255.0

IMPORTANT “r170-0001” has been registered with the host name of the REGIUS 190 at the factory, allowing the REGIUS 190 to be connected to the CS-2 as default.

1.5.1

Setting the Host Name (PC name) To change the host name (PC name) of the REGIUS 170, set using the following rules. IMPORTANT The host name is case sensitive. Pay attention when setting the host name. REGIUS 170 host name Example

Input the last 4 digits of the REGIUS 170 serial number after "r170-". When the serial number of REGIUS 170 is 0456, the host name of REGIUS 170 is:

r170-0456 REGIUS 190 host name Example

Input the last 4 digits of the REGIUS 190 serial number after "r190-". When the serial number of REGIUS 190 is 0456, the host name of REGIUS 190 is:

r190-0456 IMPORTANT Paragraphs in the following pages are mainly describing the REGIUS 170. When the REGIUS 190 is networked, read “r170-” as “r190-”.

1.5.2

Setting the IP Address To connect devices to the facility’s existing network, obtain an IP address for each device from the network administrator beforehand. If no IP address is specified, use the following addresses.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 15

1.5 Setting the Host Name & IP Address

Device

1 - 16

IP address

Subnet mask

CS-2 #1

192.168.20.90

255.255.255.0

CS-2 #2

192.168.20.91

255.255.255.0

REGIUS 170 #1

192.168.20.170

255.255.255.0

REGIUS 170 #2

192.168.20.171

255.255.255.0

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.6 Example of System Configuration

1.6 Example of System Configuration A typical set up and system configuration that includes a networked CS-2 and REGIUS 170 is shown below. Refer to this when creating a network at your facility.

1.6.1

System-1 (standard 1-to-1 connection) Printer Viewer/Server

Ethernet Hub

CS-2 Serial no. : 0225 Host name : CS2-0025 IP address : 192.168.20.90

REGIUS 170 Serial no. : 0110 Host name : r170-001 IP address : 192.168.20.170 The following example is a 1-to-1 connection with the default settings. If there is no instruction from the facility, use the factory default settings for both the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 and change the IP addresses for peripheral devices connected to the network. Post-registration can be switched to auto-registration without affecting the host name or IP address.

Setting example

CS-2 Item

Setting

Host name

CS2-0025

Host name registered in JM

CS1-0001

IP address

192.168.20.90

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

JM

Operating

Bar code registration method

Post-registration / Auto-registration

REGIUS 170 Item Host name

Setting r170-0001

Host name (on Job Manager)

r170-0001

IP address

192.168.20.170

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

IMPORTANT In the CS-2 factory default, host name CS1-0001 is registered in the JM. The reason for this is because the CS-2 can be connected to a REGIUS 170 in factory default status.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 17

1.6 Example of System Configuration

1.6.2

System-2 (n-to-m connection) Bar code reader

REGIUS 170 #1 Serial no. : 0100 Host name : r170-0100 IP address : 192.168.20.170

Ethernet CS-2 #1 (standard JM) Serial no. : 0025 Host name : CS2-0025 IP address : 192.168.20.90

Hub Printer Viewer/Server

REGIUS 170 #2 Serial no. : 0101 Host name : r170-0010 IP address : 192.168.20.171

CS-2 #2 (backup JM) Serial no. : 0026 Host name : CS2-0026 IP address : 192.168.20.91

The above example is a n-to-m configuration that includes two CS-2s and two REGIUS 170s. If no IP addresses are specified by your facility, use the IP addresses indicated in the above illustration. The standard JM runs on CS-2 #1 and a backup JM runs on CS-2 #2. The same basic configuration is used when two CS-2s are connected to one REGIUS 170, and when one CS-2 is connected to two REGIUS 170s. Setting example

CS-2 #1 (Standard JM) Item

Setting

Host name

CS2-0025

Host name registered in JM

CS2-0025

IP address

192.168.20.90

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

JM

Standard JM

Bar code registration method

Pre-registration

CS-2 #2 (Backup JM) Item to be set

1 - 18

Setting

Host name

CS2-0026

Host name registered in JM

CS2-0026

IP address

192.168.20.91

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

JM

Backup JM

Bar code registration method

Pre-registration

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.6 Example of System Configuration

REGIUS 170 #1 Item to be set

Setting

Host name

r170-0100

Host name (in Job Manager)

r170-0100

IP address

192.168.20.170

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

REGIUS 170 #2 Item to be set Host name

Setting r170-0101

Host name (in Job Manager)

r170-0101

IP address

192.168.20.171

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

IMPORTANT A bar code reader is required for each CS-2 because it is used for pre-registration. IMPORTANT To start/quit the CS-2, the CS-2 on which the standard JM runs must be started up first and closed last.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 19

1.7 Service Tool Screens

1.7 Service Tool Screens 1.7.1

Service Tool Screens Setting and maintenance of the CS-2 can be implemented by starting the Service Tool. As shown in the screen flow on the page, there are two Service Tool initial screens: one is activated from the System menu, and the other is activated from the REGIUS Service Screen. However, number of setting items on the initial screen activated from the system menu is limited.Use the Service Tool activated from the REGIUS Service Screen to perform settings during installation. Screens when started from System Menu

Screens when started from REGIUS Service Screen

1 - 20

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.7 Service Tool Screens

Opening the REGIUS Service Screen

The following procedure describes how to open the REGIUS Service Screen. IMPORTANT The REGIUS Service Screen can only be opened using the following procedure. Note that clicking [Shutdown] in the System menu automatically closes Windows and turns off the CS-2.

1.

In the initial CS-2 application splash screen, click [Konica REGIUS]. The System menu appears.

IMPORTANT The displayed content differs depending on the initial screen setting.

2.

From the System menu, click [Utility]. A password input screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 21

1.7 Service Tool Screens

3.

Input the Service Tool password (5678) and then click [J]. The Service Tool starts.

4.

Click [Exit]. A confirmation dialog appears.

5.

Click [Yes]. The screen returns to the System menu.

6.

From the System menu, click [Shutdown]. A confirmation dialog appears.

7.

Click [Yes]. The REGIUS Service Screen (REGIUS Remote Maintenance Server) appears after exiting the CS-2 application.

• Clicking [Service Tool] displays the password input screen. Input the Service Tool password (5678) and then click [J]. The Service Tool starts up; this tool can be used to configure or change all CS-2 settings.

1 - 22

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.7 Service Tool Screens

• Clicking [CS2] starts up the CS-2 application. • Clicking [Shutdown] closes Windows and turns the CS-2 OFF. • Clicking [Restart] restarts the CS-2 and the CS-2 application starts •

up again. Clicking [Windows Desktop] exits the REGIUS Service Screen and returns you to the Window desktop.

Opening the REGIUS Service Screen when the Admin Log-In Mode is ON

1.

Input the log-in name and password in the “Log-in” screen. Log-in Name : “5”, “2”, “4”, “6” Password : Maker Password Log-in is made by the maker authority and the initial screen will be displayed.

2.

Click the [KONICA MINOLTA] in the initial screen of the CS-2. System menu will be displayed.

3.

Click the [Shut Down] of the system menu. Confirmation dialogue will be displayed.

4.

Click the [YES]. After the CS-2 application is shut down, the “REGIUS Service (Regius Remote Maintenance Server)” screen will be displayed.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1 - 23

1.7 Service Tool Screens

1 - 24

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

2

Installing the CS-2

This page intentionally left blank.

2.1 Installation Flow

2.1 Installation Flow The overall workflow for installation is listed below.

Start

1. Unpacking & connecting

Section 3, "Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2"

2. Setting up the CS-2 Operation Unit

Section 4, "Setting Up the CS-2 Operation Unit"

3. CS-2 PROGRAM version

Section 5, "Upgrading the CS-2 Program"

4. Connecting the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170

Section 6.1, "Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection" Section 6.2, "Setting up an n-to-m Connection"

Configure settings to connect the CS-2, REGIUS 170 and JM.

5. Connecting to the system Move the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 specified location and connect to the network, then connect optional devices. Once that work is completed, connect the luminance meter to adjust the brightness of the operation unit.

6. Setting up the CS-2

Section 7.1, "Connecting a luminance meter" Section 7.2, "Connecting to the Network" Section 7.3, "Installing Bar Code Reader"

Section 8, "Setting Up the CS-2"

Set facilityand peripheral device information.

7. Adjusting the CS-2 Operation Unit brightness

Section 9, "Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit"

8. Checking operation

Section 10.1, "Checking the Image"

Check the image output from the REGIUS 170.

9. Back up

Section 10.2, "Backing Up the Set Up Data"

Configure backup settings for the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 parameters.

End CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

2-1

2.2 Checks Prior to Installation

2.2 Checks Prior to Installation Check the following items before installing the CS-2. Installation Location Check that the installation site satisfies the conditions listed below.

• Install the device in a location where it is not exposed to water or floor wax.

• Install the device in a location where there is no likelihood of being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, drafts, light, dust or air containing salt, sulfur, etc.

• Install the device on a flat surface where it is free from violation or physical shock (also avoid physical shocks during transportation).

• Install the device in a location where chemical agents are not stored.

• Install the device in a location where no gas is generated. • Install the device in a location where there are no electrical noise sources.

• Lay the cable so that it is not tripped over by the staff working around the device.

• Install the device in a location where the air inlet and outlet are not blocked.

• Install the device in a location where a minimum of 150 mm of space in front and in rear of the CS-2 can be secured.

2.2.1

System Condition Work and setup required at the time of installation may vary depending on the system configuration.

• Connection type of CS-2 and REGIUS 170. (whether the connection is made 1-to-1 or n-to-m)

• Registration method of cassette (post-registration, auto-registration or pre-registration). However, a bar code reader is essential when the connection is n-to-m.

• When registration with a bar code reader (advance registration) is selected, install the bar code reader to the CS-2.

2.2.2

Network Condition In the case that the CS-2 is connected to the facility's network, acquire the following information by interviewing the system adminstrator in your facility.

• The factory default settings can be used; alternately, you may need to contact your facility's system adminstrator.

• IP addresses of CS-2 and REGIUS 170. • When a setup for gateway is necessary, IP address of the gateway.

2-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

2.2 Checks Prior to Installation

2.2.3

CS-2 Operation Unit The CS-2 Operation Unit is a color LCD monitor with a touch panel. After installing it in an appropriate location, calibrate the touch panel and adjust the brightness. The brightness must be adjusted while monitor display brightness is stable. Typically, the display will become stable 20 minutes after being turned ON. Note that turning the power OFF for a short period of time during system reboot has little effect on the display, thus such short interruptions can be ignored.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

2-3

2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation

2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation Prepare the following tools and jigs before starting the installation.

2-4

Item

Purpose

Luminance Meter • Luminance meter (Konica Minolta LS-100) • Luminance meter cable (LS-A12) • Chest front side image

Adjust the luminance of the CS-2 Operation Unit.

Floppy disk (several disks)

Back up CS-2 settings data

Cross cable for Ethernet or Ethernet Cable & Hub

Connect the REGIUS 170 to a network

Double-side tape

Secure the stand for bar code reader

3P-2P AC plug adapter (several pieces)

May be needed to check CS-2 operation at a site other than installation site or for temporary installation of the REGIUS 170

Latest version of the CS-2 PROGRAM CD

Upgrade the system

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

3

Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2

This page intentionally left blank.

3.1 Unpacking

3.1 Unpacking Unpack the CS-2 Control Unit and CS-2 Operation Unit and check that there are no damaged or missing items.

3.1.1

CS-2 Control Unit 1. PC Main Body 2. Keyboard (2m) 3. Mouse (1.8m) 4. Power cable 5. Quick Reference (Manual) 6. PC service & support guide 7. IBM warranty, IBM warranty service flow 8. Stand for vertical installation 9. Up flow vent 10. Power plug with ground 11. IBM items in package and software list 12. Warranty (KMMG) 13. Instruction manual

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

3-1

3.1 Unpacking

3.1.2

CS-2 Operation Unit 1. Monitor 2. Power cord 3. 2-lead adaptor 4. Signal cable (MD-C87) 5. USB cable (MD-C93) 6. Stereo mini jack cable 7. Instruction Manual (this book) 8. Warranty 9. Screws for the stand (M4 × 12mm, 4 pieces) 10.CD-ROM for touch panel (includes TouchWare touch panel driver software and an instruction manual)

3-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

3.2 Assembling

3.2 Assembling 3.2.1

Connecting Cables Refer to the following illustration to connect the CS-2 main unit and any accessories.

CS-2 Control Unit (rear view)

Mouse

CS-2 Operation Unit (rear view)

Keyboard

AC100V

3.2.2

AC100V

Attaching the up flow vent Refer to the following illustration to attach the upflow vent; insert it into the groove provided in the rear of the CS-2 Control Unit.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

3-3

3.2 Assembling

3.2.3

Attaching the stand for vertical installation Refer to the following illustration to position the CS-2 Control Unit; place the lower front part in the included stand.

3-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4

Setting Up the CS-2 Operation Unit

This page intentionally left blank.

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel 4.1.1

Checking the Factory Default Status

1.

To start up the CS-2, turn ON the CS-2 Operation Unit and CS-2 Control Unit, in that order. IMPORTANT When the following Examination Registration screen appears, there is no error with the factory default status.

2.

Click [Return to Windows Desktop] in the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details on how to open the REGIUS Service screen.

4.1.2

Installing the Touch Panel Software Then proceed to the installation of the touch panel driver software. To install the touch panel driver, shut down the CS-2 application first, then operate on the Windows desktop. IMPORTANT It is necessary to go through the "REGIUS Service" screen to display the Windows desktop. Note that shutting down directly using the system menu by clicking "Shutdown" will automatically shut down the Windows, resulting in power off of the CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of opening the "REGIUS Service" screen.

1.

Shut down the CS-2 application, and display the "REGIUS Service" screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to display the "REGIUS Service" screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4-1

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

2.

Click [Windows Desktop].

• REGIUS Service Screen closes, and the Windows desktop will be shown.

• "Found New Hardware Wizard" screen is displayed on the desktop.

3.

4-2

Click [Cancel].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

4.

Insert into the CD-RW drive the CD-ROM that is provided in the CS-3 Operation Unit packing. CD will be auto-started, and wait for the following screen to appear.

5.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Click [Install Software].

4-3

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

6.

Click [TouchWare for Windows(95,98,Me,NT4,2000,XP)]. A Wizard will start to install the touch panel driver software.

4-4

7.

Click [Next >].

8.

Click [I Accept] , then [Next >].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

9.

10.

Click [USB] , then [Next >].

Click [Express Install], then [Next >]. Copy of files initiates, followed by display of the screen below.

11.

Click [Cont]. Installation of the driver initiates.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4-5

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

12.

Click [Yes, I want to view the ReadMe file. ] to untick the check mark, then click [Finish].

13.

Click [OK].

IMPORTANT If the USB port on the CS-2 Control Unit, to which the USB cable from the CS-2 Operation Unit shall be connected is changed, the touch panel will be detected as a new device, and the "New Device Detected" wizard will be displayed again. Therefore, do not change the USB port to which the connection is made.

4-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume

4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume If necessary, refer to Section 1.3.4, "CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)" to check the button position, then adjust the speaker volume according to the following procedure.

1.

Press the [ENT.] button. The following screen appears.

2.

Select <Sound> and then press the [ENT.] button. The following screen appears.

3.

Select and then press the [ENT.] button. The following screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4-7

4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume

4.

Press the [YZ] Control button to adjust the sound to the appropriate volume. The following screen appears.

5.

Press the [ENT.] button. The following screen appears.

6.

Select and then press the [ENT.] button. The following screen appears.

7.

Select <Menu OFF> and then press the [ENT.] button to quit the Screen Manager application.

4-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

5

Upgrading the CS-2 Program How to upgrade the CS-3 program is described in this chapter. If the program installed on the CS-3 that is delivered from the factory is not the latest one, follow the procedures described in this chapter and upgrade the program.

This page intentionally left blank.

5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM

5.1

Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM IMPORTANT Follow the procedures below to upgrade the CS-2 PROGRAM installed on the CS-2 Control Unit by factory default. If the program is the latest version, perform Steps 8 and 9 and then close Windows.

1.

Insert the CS-2 PROGRAM CD in the CD drive.

2.

The CS-2 Setup screen appears. Click the [Cancel] button.

3.

Right-click the [Start] button, then select [Explorer (X)] from the popup menu.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

5-1

5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM

4.

In the hierarchical folder tree on the left side of the Explorer window, click the CD drive and then the folder named “Versionup”, then doubleclick the [Install] icon on the right side of Explorer. The command prompt appears and upgrading of the CS-2 PROGRAM begins. IMPORTANT The items displayed on the screen will be different depending on the CS-2 Program.

5.

When "Install completed." is displayed, press the <Enter> key. IMPORTANT Several command prompts may appear depending on the CS-3 PROGRAM. If other command prompts still remain on the screen after the message ÅgInstall completedÅh is displayed, wait until all other command prompts disappear before pressing the [Enter] key.

5-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM

6.

Click [X] at the upper right corner of the “Explore” to close the screen. IMPORTANT If RmtGroup(.Dbg) icon is located on the Windows desktop, drag it to the trash box and empty the trash box.

7.

Eject the CS-2 PROGRAM CD from the CD drive.

8.

Click [Start] in the lower left corner of the screen and then click "Shutdown options (U)" from the displayed menu.

9.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Click [Turn Off] Computer to shut down the Windows.

5-3

5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM

5-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6

Connecting a CS-2 and REGIUS 170 This chapter describes how to connect a CS-2, REGIUS 170 and JM. Since settings differ depending on the system configuration, explanations are provided for both 1-to-1 and n-to-m connections. This chapter only explains basic settings. For an explanation of other settings in a specific setup screen, see Section 15, "Service Tool Screens".

This page intentionally left blank.

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection This section describes how to connect a single CS-2 to a single REGIUS 170 using a 1-to-1 connection. Small-sized networks such as connecting a single CS-2, REGIUS 170 and KonicaMinolta printer can be created without changing the factory default settings. When a factory default CS-2 is connected to a REGIUS 170, the post-registration method is used. However, for the case described below, change the setting of CS-2 and REGIUS 170 according to the procedure described in this section.

• When it is necessary to change the address because the system is connected to the facility's existing network.

• To connect several 1-to-1 connection units to the same network. The explanation in this section is based on the settings shown below.

Printer Viewer/Server

Ethernet Hub

CS-2 Serial no. Host name IP address Cassette registration

: : : :

0025 CS2-0025 192.168.20.90 Auto-registration

REGIUS 170 Serial no. Host name IP address Subnet mask

: : : :

0100 r170-0100 128.100.50.11 255.255.0.0

IMPORTANT It is possible to configure a 1-to-1 connection system to use pre-registration; however, as a rule, you should use the post-registration or auto-registration method. To use pre-registration, you must connect a bar code reader.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-1

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

6.1.1

Network Setting of REGIUS 170

Temporary Connection of CS-2 and REGIUS 170

To connect a CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 via Ethernet, the devices have been configured so that they can communicate using the factory default. The set up of the REGIUS 170 below shall be made by temporary connecting the CS-2 in a 1-to-1 configuration.

1.

Plug the REGIUS 170 into a wall outlet.

2.

Using a cross cable or hub, connect the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in a 1to-1 configuration. IMPORTANT This configuration is a temporary case purely for the purposes of configuring the REGIUS 170. Do not connect several REGIUS 170s to the hub at the same time. Doing so prevents correct recognition of each device due to the fact that all REGIUS 170s are preset with the same IP address, and in consequence it becomes impossible to set up the device.

CS-2

Temporary hub

REGIUS 170 to be set up

or

Cross cable

IMPORTANT If the CS-2 or JM settings are changed before setting up the REGIUS 170, the REGIUS 170 cannot be set up because communication with the REGIUS 170 is disabled. If this happens, reset the CS-2 to the factory defaults and try again. Starting up a CS-2 and REGIUS 170

1.

Press the power switch on the CS-2 Control Unit to start up the CS-2. Wait until the initial screen shows after the CS-2 starts up.

2.

Turn ON the circuit breaker for the REGIUS 170.

3.

Press the operation switch on the REGIUS 170 to turn ON the power. Wait for the REGIUS 170 to complete initialization and to show “READY” on the LCD.

6-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

Setting up the REGIUS 170

The following procedures are initiated from the CS-2 Operation Unit.

1.

Use the mouse or touch panel to open the REGIUS Service Screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of how to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

2.

Click Service Tool. A password input screen appears again.

3.

Input the Service Tool password (5678) and then click OK. The Service Tool (Console) screen appears.

4.

Click Reader. The Service Tool (Reader) screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-3

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

5.

In the “REGIUS 170” setting field on the bottom of the screen,click the [Network] button. Current status of networking information acquired from REGIUS 170 appears on the “Network Info.” screen.

The CS-2 is defined by the factory defaults in the HOSTS file in the REGIUS 170.

6.

Input the network condition for REGIUS 170 in the “Reader” column by referring to the following table. Item to be set

Description

Host Name

Input the host name of the target REGIUS 170. r170-**** : **** indicates the serial number. IMPORTANT Always use lowercase.

IP Address

Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170.

Netmask

Input the subnet mask of the network.

Example:

6-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

7.

Input in “DBHOST” of “Console/JobManager” the host name that will be assigned to the REGIUS170. Item to be set

Description

DBHOST

Input the host name of the JM. It is fixed as “jm10001”

IMPORTANT Always use lowercase. Example:

8.

In the list of “Hosts”, select the host name for the CS-2 and then click “Edit”. Edit dialog appears.

9.

Input the host name and IP address of the CS-2 that will be connected to the REGIUS 170 and then click [OK]. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to input the host name of the CS-2. Confirmation dialog for rewriting appears.

10.

Click [Yes]. The host name and IP address that were input in the “Hosts” list appear. Example:

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-5

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

11.

Click [New]. New dialog appears.

12.

In a same manner as Steps 9 and 10, input the host name “jm1-0001” and the IP address “128.100.50.1”, and click [OK IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input the host name (jm1-0001). Dialogue to confirm addition appears.

13.

Click [YES]. Added information appears in the “Hosts” list. Example:

IMPORTANT Because the console (CS-2) and JM will be accessed for different purposes, as shown above, assign different IP addresses to the CS2-0025 and jm1-0001.

14.

Click “Send”. The setting shown on the screen will be sent to the REGIUS 170, and the network setting will be altered.

• These setting conditions will be written in the CF (Compact Flash) of the REGIUS 170. IMPORTANT For a 1-to-1 connection, the CS-2 that will be registered in the Hosts list should be the one that is connected to the target REGIUS 170.

6-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

15.

Click “Exit” to close the Network Set Up screen. Returns to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.

16.

Press the operation switch to turn off the power of the REGIUS 170.

17.

Turn off the circuit breaker of the REGIUS 170. Implementing the above procedure completes the set up of REGIUS 170. Then proceed to the set up of the CS-2. CAUTION

6.1.2

The REGIUS-170 whose network condition has been changed is no more capable of communicating with the CS2 until the network condition of the CS-2 (and JM) is newly set up. Upon the start up of the REGIUS 170, a network error appears on the LCD after completing the initialization, and its own MAC address and IP address will blink alternately.

Setting up the CS-2 This section describes how to set up JM on the CS-2, the settings required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the network settings for the CS-2 itself. Setting up JM on the CS-2

1.

In the Service Tool screen, select Console and then in the "Input/ Output" settings area click the [Job Manager] button. The JOBM INFO screen appears.

By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.

2.

In the “Basic Setting” area, select the “Auto-registration” option from the drop down menu to the right of the Register setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-7

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

3.

In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, select the “ON” checkbox for the “Built-in” setting.

4.

In the Host Name field, enter a host name for the CS-2 itself (CS2-****: **** indicates a serial number). IMPORTANT

Always use uppercase for the CS-2 host name.

Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) in the above system.

5.

Click the [Save & Exit] button, then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. The Service Tool screen appears.

Setting up the JM database

If the host name of the CS-2 or REGIUS 170 has been changed from the factory default, you must use the following procedure to update the information registered in the database. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to input the host name for the CS-2 and lowercase to input the host name for the REGIUS170.

1.

6-8

On the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

2.

In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Configure] button. The PostgreSQL access tool starts.

Changing the Registered Information of CS-2 and REGIUS 170

1.

When the host name of CS-2 is changed, double-click [c_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool. “c_status” screen appears. When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.

IMPORTANT By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.

2.

Click [CS1-0001]. Switches to the text input mode.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-9

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

3.

Rewrite “CS1-0001” to the altered host name (uppercase). Example: Configuring the CS-2 system (serial no. 0025)

4.

After completing the input, click [Reload] --> [Close]. “c_status” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

5.

When the host name of REGIUS 170 is changed, double-click [r_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool. “r_status” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.

6.

Click [r170-0001]. Switches to the text input mode.

7.

Rewrite “r170-0001” to the altered host name (lower case) of the REGIUS 170. Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

8.

After completing the input, click [Reload] --> [Close]. “r_status” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

6-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

9.

When the host name of REGIUS 170 is changed, double-click [r_version] of “PostgreSQL access” tool. “r_version” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.

10.

Click [r170-0001]. Switches to the text input mode.

11.

Rewrite “r170-0001” to the altered host name(lower case) of the REGIUS 170. Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

12.

After completing the input, click [Reload] --> [Close]. “r_version” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-11

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

13.

When the host name of the CS-2 or the REGIUS 170 is changed, double-click [relations]. “relations” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2 and lowercase for the host name for the REGIUS 170.

14.

When the host name of the CS-2 is changed, click “CS1-0001”, and rewrite it to the altered host name(uppercase).

15.

When the host name of the REGIUS 170 is changed, click “r170-0001”, and rewrite it to the altered host name (lower case). Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) and REGIUS 170 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

16.

After completing the input, click [Reload] --> [Close]. “relation” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

Setting the cassette registration method

Check the cassette registration method. "0" (post-registration or auto-registration) is set by default. The relationship between "reg_type" and the cassette registration method configured in the “Setting up JM on the CS-2” section is described in the table below. Always set according to this relationship.

6-12

Cassette registration method

reg_type

Post-registration

1

Auto-registration

1

Pre-registration

0

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

1.

In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “sys_config” entry. The “sys_config” screen appears.

2.

Check that "reg_type" is set to "1".

3.

Click [Reload] and then [Close] . The “sys_config” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool reappears.

4.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, click "Database" and then select [Exit].

The PostgreSQL access tool closes and the Service Tool (Adjustment) screen reappears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-13

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

Establishing a network connection between the CS-2 and REGIUS 170

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Console] button and then in the “System” settings area click the [System Info] button. The SYSTEM INFO screen appears.

2.

Select "System Config. (Reader)" from the list at the left side of the screen.

3.

In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if it is not already selected, select the “Registered” check box next to the "Reader 1" entry.

4.

Click the "Model Name (Generic)" field and enter the generic name of the REGIUS 170.

6-14

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

5.

Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and enter the specific name of the REGIUS 170. These names are displayed in the System Status and Service Tool screens of the CS-2 application and allow users to select a specific REGIUS 170.

6.

Click the [Save&Exit] button and then click [Yes] when the confirmation dialog is displayed. The Service Tool (Console) screen reappears.

7.

Click the [Reader] button. The Service Tool (Reader) screen appears.

8.

In the "System" settings area, click the [Reader] button. The CCU INFO screen appears.

9.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using uppercase letters, enter the host name for the REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter this host name.

10.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using lowercase letters, enter the host name for the REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field. IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to enter this host name.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-15

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

11.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for the REGIUS 170 in the “IP Address” field. Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

12.

Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] when the confirmation dialog is displayed. The Service Tool (Reader) screen reappears.

Setting the network connection for the CS-2 itself

1.

Quit the Service Tool and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the REGIUS Service screen to display the Windows desktop.

2.

Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen and then select “Control Panel (C)” from the displayed menu.

6-16

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

3.

In the Control Panel, click the "Network and Internet Connections" icon.

4.

Click the "Network Connections" icon.

5.

Double-click "Local Area Connections".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-17

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

6-18

6.

Click "Properties (P)".

7.

Double-click "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)".

8.

Set the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

9.

Click [OK].

10.

Click [OK].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-19

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

Shutting down the system

1.

Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.

2.

Click the "Shutdown Options (U)" icon.

3.

Select "Shutdown (U)" from the displayed dialog. The CS-2 is turned OFF.

4.

Remove the Ethernet cable that was temporarily connected between the CS-2 Control Unit and the REGIUS 170. Implementing the above procedures completes the set up one each of REGIUS 170 and CS-2. To set up several CS-2s and REGIUS 170s, repeat the procedures starting from Section 6.1.1, "Network Setting of REGIUS 170".

6-20

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection This section describes an n-to-m configuration that includes two CS-2s and two REGIUS 170s. In this example, the settings are based on the conditions requested by the facility.

Bar code reader

Ethernet CS-2 (standard JM) Serial no. Host name IP address Subnet mask Cassette registration

: : : : :

CS-2 (backup JM) Serial no. Host name IP address Subnet mask Cassette registration

0025 CS2-0025 128.100.50.1 255.255.0.0 Pre-registration

Hub

REGIUS 70 #1 Serial no. : 0100 Host name : r170-0100 IP address : 128.100.50.11

Printer Viewer/Server

REGIUS 70 #2 Serial no. : 0101 Host name : r170-0101 IP address : 128.100.50.12 : : : : :

0026 CS2-0026 128.100.50.2 255.255.0.0 Pre-registration

IMPORTANT In an n-to-m configuration, the bar code registration method must be set to "Pre-registration". IMPORTANT To start operating the system, always turn on the power of the CS-2 which incorporates the standatd JM, and turn off this CS-2 last when terminating the operation. Instruct the users to observe this rule in daily operation.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-21

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6.2.1

Setting Up the REGIUS 170

Temporarily Connecting the CS-2 and REGIUS 170

To enable the CS-2 to implement the set up of REGIUS 170 via Ethernet, both have been set up at the factory so that they can communicate using the factory setting. The set up of REGIUS 170 in the below shall be made by temporary connecting the CS-2 in a “1-to1” configuration.

1.

Plug the REGIUS 170 into a wall outlet.

2.

Connect the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in 1-to-1 using cross cable or hub. IMPORTANT This connection is a temporary case purely for the purpose of setting the REGIUS 170. Do not connect several units of REGIUS 170 to hub at the same time. Doing so hinders recognition of each device due to the fact that all of REGIUS 170 are preset at the same IP address and in consequence it becomes impossible to set up.

CS-2

Temporary hub

REGIUS 170 to be set up

or

Cross cable

IMPORTANT If the setting of CS-2 or JM is changed before setting the REGIUS 170, setting of the REGIUS 170 becomes impossible because communication with the REGIUS 170 is disabled. If this happens, reset the CS-2 to factory setting the factory setting and try again. Starting up a CS-2 and REGIUS 170

1.

Press the power SW of the CS-2 Control Unit. Wait until the initial screen shows after the CS-2 starts up.

2.

Turn ON the circuit breaker of REGIUS 170.

3.

Press the Operation switch of the REGIUS 170 to turn ON the power. Wait for the REGIUS 170 to complete initialization and to show “READY” on the LCD.

6-22

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Setting of REGIUS170

1.

Following procedures shall be initiated from the CS-2 Operation Unit. Operate the mouse or touch panel to open the REGIUS Service Screen. Refer to 1.6.1 for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

2.

Click [Service Tool]. A password input screen appears again.

3.

Input a Service Tool password (5678) and then click OK. The Service Tool (Console) screen appears.

4.

Click [Reader]. The Service Tool (Reader) screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-23

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

5.

Click [Network] in the "REGIUS 170" field located on the bottom of the screen. Current status of networking information acquired from REGIUS 170 appears on the network setting screen.

The CS-2 is defined by the factory defaults in the HOSTS file in the REGIUS 170.

6.

Input the network condition for REGIUS 170 in the “Reader” column by referring to the following table. Item to be set

Description

Host Name

Input the host name of the target REGIUS 170. r170-**** : **** indicates the serial number.

IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input. IP Address

Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170.

Netmask

Input the subnet mask of the REGIUS 170.

Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

6-24

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

7.

Input in “DBHOST” of “Console/JobManager” the host name of the JM with which the REGIUS 170 communicate. Item to be set

Description

DBHOST

Input the host name of the JM. It is fixed as “jm1-0001”.

IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input. Example:

8.

In the list of “Hosts”, select the host name for CS-2 (CS2-#1), and click [Edit]. Edit dialog appears.

9.

Input the host name and IP address of the first CS-2 which will be connected to the REGIUS 170. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to input the host name of CS-2. Confirmation dialog for rewriting appears.

10.

Click [Yes]. The host name and IP address that were input in the “Hosts” list appears.

11.

Click [New]. New dialog appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-25

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

12.

Input the host name and IP address of the second CS-2 (CS-2 #2) which will be connected to the REGIUS 170. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to input the host name of CS-2. Confirmation dialog for addition appears.

13.

Click [Yes]. The host name and IP address that were input in the “Hosts” list appears. Example: Setting of the CS-2 #1(serial no.: 0025), CS-2 #2 (serial no.: 0026) in the above system.

14.

In a same manner as the step 11 through 13, input the host name “jm1-0001” and the IP address “128.100.50.1”, and click [OK]. Further to set the back up JM, input the host name “jm1-0002” and the IP address “128.100.50.2”. IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input (jm1-0001, jm10002). Dialogue to confirm addition appears.

15.

Click [YES]. Added information appears in the “Hosts” list. Example:

IMPORTANT Because the console (CS-2) and the JM will be accessed for different purpose, assign the same IP address to both CS2-0025 and jm1-0001 as shown above. Same should be applied to CS2-0026 and jm1-0002.

6-26

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

16.

After checking that the host name shown in the “Hosts” list and the IP address is correct and not duplicating the other, then click “Send”. The setting shown on the screen will be sent to the REGIUS 170, and the network setting will be altered.

• These setting conditions will be written in the CF (Compact Flash) of the REGIUS 170. Example: Setting of the REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no.: 0101) in the above system.

17.

Click [Exit] to close the “Network Info.” screen. Returns to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.

18.

Press and hold the operation switch for 5sec to turn off the power of the REGIUS 170.

19.

Turn off the circuit breaker of the REGIUS 170. IMPORTANT In the case that the CS-2s and REGIUS 170s are connected in “n” to “m” configuration, the settings for “JM” and “Hosts” should be same for all REGIUS 170s to be connected. “Host Name” and “IP Address” of “Reader” should be unique for each REGIUS 170. CAUTION

20.

The REGIUS-170 whose network condition has been changed is no more capable of communicating with the CS2 until the network condition of the CS-2 (and JM) is newly set up. Upon the start up of the REGIUS 170, a network error appears on the LCD after completing the initialization, and its own MAC address and IP address will blink alternately.

Click [Exit] on the “Service Tool” screen. Confirmation dialog appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-27

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

21.

Click [Yes]. Switches to the “REGIUS Service Screen”.

22.

Click [Shut down]. “REGIUS Service” screen will close, and termination sequence will be initiated. Upon closure of the CS-2 application, the power of CS-2 will be turned off.

23.

Remove the Ethernet cable that is temporary connected between the CS-2 Control Unit and the REGIUS 170. Implementing the above procedures completes the set up one REGIUS 170. To set up all REGIUS 170s that should be connected, repeat the procedures starting from "Temporarily Connecting the CS-2 and REGIUS 170" on page 6-22.

6-28

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6.2.2

Setting up the Standard JM on the CS-2 This section describes how to set up JM on the CS-2, the settings required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the network settings for the CS-2 itself. For details of how to set up the backup JM, refer to Section 6.2.3, "Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2".

Setting up the standard JM on the CS-2

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Console] button and then in the “Input/Output” settings area click the [Job Manager] button. The JOBM INFO screen appears.

By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.

2.

Select the “Auto-registration” option from the drop down menu to the right of the Register setting.

3.

In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, select the “ON” checkbox for the “Built-in” setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-29

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

4.

In the Host Name field, enter a host name for the CS-2 itself (CS2-****: **** indicates a serial number). IMPORTANT

Always use uppercase for the CS-2 host name.

Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) in the above system.

5.

To use CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) as a backup JM, select the “Registered Device” checkbox in the "Communication Setting (Backup)" settings area.

• Enter the IP address for CS-2 #2 in the "IP Address" field.

6.

Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. The screen switches back to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

6-30

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Setting up the JM database

If the host name of the CS-2 or REGIUS 170 has been changed from the factory default, you must use the following procedure to update the information registered in the database. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter the host name for the CS-2 and lowercase to enter the host name for the REGIUS 170.

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button.

2.

In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Configure] button. The PostgreSQL access tool starts.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-31

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Connecting the CS-2 & REGIUS 170

1.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “c-status” entry. The “c_status” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.

IMPORTANT By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.

2.

Click "CS1-0001". The system enters text input mode.

3.

Input "CS1-0001" for the host name (uppercase) for the first CS-2.

4.

Press the TAB key to move to the "c_stat" row.

5.

Enter "2". Press the TAB key to move to the next row. The system enters text input mode again.

6.

Enter the host name of the second CS-2 and press the TAB key to move to the "c_stat" column.

7.

Enter “2”. Example: Configuring CS-2 #1 (serial no. 0025) and CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the above system.

8.

When you finish entering, click [Reload].

9.

Check that all entries are correct, then click [Exit]. The "c_status" screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool reappears.

6-32

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

10.

In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “r-status” entry. The r_status screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.

11.

Click "r170-0001". The system enters text input mode.

12.

Rewrite "r170-0001" by the host name (lowercase) for the first REGIUS 170.

13.

Press the TAB key to move to the "r_stat" column.

14.

Enter “2". Press the TAB key to move to the next row. The next row now accepts text input.

15.

Enter the host name (lowercase) for the second REGIUS 170 and press the TAB key to move to the "r_stat" column.

16.

Enter “2”. Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) and REGIUS 170 #2 (serial no. 0101) in the above system.

17.

After completing the input, click [Reload] and [Close] in that order. “r_status” screen closes, and switches to “PostgreSQL access” tool.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-33

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

18.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “r-version” entry. The “r_version” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase to enter the host name for the CS-2.

19.

Click “r170-0001”. The system enters text input mode.

20.

Rewrite “r170-0001” by the host name (lowercase) for the first REGIUS 170.

21.

Press the TAB key to move to the next row. The next row now accepts text input.

22.

Enter the host name (lowercase) for the second REGUIS 170.

23.

When you finish entering host name information, click [Reload] and then [Close]. “r_version” screen will close, and switch to “PostgreSQL access” tool.

6-34

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Setting the Relations

Set the relationship between the CS-2(s) and REGIUS 170(s). In the “n-to-m connection”, setting the relations between the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 will enable a linked-operation as to the power control, error information between the CS-2 and corresponding REGIUS 170. This section describes settings used to associate CS-2s and REGIUS 170s.

1.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “relations” entry. The “relations” screen appears. IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2 and lowercase to enter the host name for the REGIUS 170.

2.

Click "CS1-0001" and input the host name for the first CS-2 (use only uppercase characters).

3.

Press the TAB key to move to the "re_name" column.

4.

Rewrite the host name by the first REGIUS 170 (use only lowercase characters).

5.

Press the TAB key to move to the "alert" column.

6.

Enter "1" and press the TAB key again. The next row now accepts text input.

7.

Enter the host name for the first CS-2 (use only uppercase characters).

8.

Press the TAB key to move to the "re_name" column.

9.

Enter the host name for the second REGIUS 170 (use only lowercase characters).

10.

Press the TAB key to move to the "alert" column.

11.

Enter "1" and press the TAB key.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-35

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

12.

In the same way, enter the host name for the second CS-2 and REGIUS 170. Example: Settings when all CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in the above system are all related.

13.

When you finish entering host name information, click [Reload] and then [Close]. The “relations” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool reappears.

Setting the cassette registration method

This section describes how to set the cassette registration method. By default, the method is set to "1" (Post-registration or Autoregistration). The relationship between "reg_type" and the cassette registration method configured in the "Setting up JM on the CS-2" on page 6-7 is described in the table below. Always set according to this relationship.

1.

Cassette registration method

reg_type

Post-registration

1

Auto-registration

1

Pre-registration

0

In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “sys_config” entry. The “sys_config” screen appears.

2.

Enter 0 (zero) in the "reg_type" field.

3.

Click [Reload] and then [Close] in that order. The “sys_config” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool reappears.

6-36

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

4.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, select [Database] > [Exit].

The PostgreSQL access screen closes and the Service Tool screen reappears. Backing up JM information

After you set up the JM database, you can back up the settings to a floppy disk.

1.

Insert a floppy disk in the CS-2 Control Unit floppy disk drive.

2.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button and then in the Job Manager settings area click the [Backup] button.

A command prompt appears on the screen and backup starts. Backup data is saved on the floppy disk in a file called “jm_backup.bat”. Upon completion of backup, the command prompt closes.

3.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Remove the backup floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

6-37

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Setting the CS-2 to connect with the REGIUS 170

This section describes how to set up the REGIUS 170s connected to the CS-2 and the device name for each REGIUS 170.

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Console] button and then in the "System" settings area click the [System Info] button. The SYSTEM INFO screen appears.

2.

Select "System Config. (Reader)" from the list at the left side of the screen.

3.

In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if they are not already selected, select the “Registered” check boxes next to the "Reader 1" and “reader 2” entries.

4.

Click the "Model Name (Generic)" field and enter the generic name of the REGIUS 170.

6-38

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

5.

Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and enter the specific name of the REGIUS 170. These names are displayed in the System Status and Service Tool screens of the CS-2 application and allow users to select a specific REGIUS 170. Enter names that you can identify easily (for example, the name of the X-ray room where the REGIUS 170 is installed.) Example: X-ray Room No. 1, X-Ray Room No. 2, etc.

6.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Reader] button. The Service Tool (Reader) screen appears.

7.

In the “System” settings area, click the [Reader] button. The CCU INFO screen appears. The display names of the REGIUS 170s you entered in Step 5 are displayed In the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-39

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

8.

Select the first REGIUS 170 device name.

9.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using uppercase letters, enter the host name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter this host name.

10.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using lowercase letters, enter the host name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field. IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to enter this host name.

11.

In the “IP Address” of “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for the first REGIUS 170 set in the “IP Address” field. Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

12.

From the list in the upper left corner of the screen, select the second REGIUS 170 device name.

13.

Repeat Steps 9-11 to enter the Host Name, Host Name (JM) and the IP Address for the second REGIUS 170.

14.

Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. The Service Tool (Reader) screen reappears.

6-40

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Setting the network connection for the CS-2 itself

1.

Quit the Service Tool and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the REGIUS Service screen to display the Windows desktop.

2.

Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen and then select “Control Panel (C)” from the displayed menu.

3.

In the Control Panel, click the "Network and Internet Connections" icon.

4.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Click the "Network Connections" icon.

6-41

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6-42

5.

Double-click "Local Area Connections".

6.

Click "Properties (P)".

7.

Double-click "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

8.

Set the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.

9.

Click [OK].

10.

Click [OK].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-43

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

Shutting down the system

1.

Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.

2.

Click the "Shutdown Options (U)" icon.

3.

Select "Shutdown (U)" from the displayed dialog. The CS-2 is turned OFF.

Set up of a standard JM on the CS-2 is completed. The following section describes how to set up a backup JM on a CS-2.

6.2.3

Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2 This section describes how to set up a backup JM on the CS-2, the settings required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the network settings for the CS-2 itself.

Setting up a backup JM on the CS-2

1.

In the Service Tool screen, select the [Console] button and then in the "Input/Output" settings area click the [Job Manager] button. The JOBM INFO screen appears.

6-44

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

2.

In the “Basic Setting” area, select the “Pre-registration” option from the drop down menu to the right of the Register setting.

IMPORTANT For a CS-2 in an n-to-m configuration, always set preregistration for the cassette registration method.

3.

In the Host Name field, enter a host name for the CS-2 itself (CS2-****: **** indicates a serial number). IMPORTANT

Always use uppercase for the CS-2 host name.

Example: Configuring CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the above system.

4.

In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, clear the “ON” checkbox for the “Job Manager (build-in)” setting.

5.

In the "Communication Setting” area, enter the IP address of the CS2 for the standard JM in "IP Address" of "Communication Setting". Example: Configuring CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the above system.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-45

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6.

To use a CS-2 as a backup JM, in the "Communication Setting (Backup)" settings area, select the “Registered Device” checkbox .

• Select the "Job Manager (build in)" ON checkbox. • Enter the IP address of CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the “IP Address (backup)” field.

7.

Click [Save & Exit] then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. The screen switches back to the Service Tool screen.

Setting Up the Backup JM DB

For the backup JM, register the database in the same manner as was for "Setting Up the JM Database".

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment ] button.

2.

Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the CS-2 Control Unit that contains the JM DB backup data that was backed up with the Service Tool (Reader) screen.

6-46

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

3.

In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Restore] button.

A command prompt appears on the screen and the restore operation begins. Upon completion of restoration, the command prompt closes. This procedure sets the contents of the JM database on CS-2 so that they are the same as CS-2 #1.

4.

Remove the backup floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

5.

In the "Job Manager" settings area, click the [Configure] button. The PostgreSQL access tool starts.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-47

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6.

In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “c-status” entry. The “c_status” screen appears.

7.

Check that the host name of each CS-2 is correctly set in "c_name" and the value of "c_stat" is set to 2.

• If the value of "c_stat" is not 2, reenter the number 2 by clicking the wrong number.

8.

After confirming the above, click the [Close] button.

9.

In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “r-status” entry. The “r_status” screen appears.

10.

Check that the host name of each REGIUS 170 is correctly set in "c_name" and that the value of "r_stat" is set to 2.

• If the value of "r_stat" is not 2, reenter the number 2 by clicking the wrong number.

11.

6-48

After confirming the above, click the [Close] button.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

12.

In the PostgreSQL access screen, select [Database] > [Exit].

The PostgreSQL access screen closes and the Service Tool screen reappears. Setting up a connection between the CS-2 and REGIUS 170

This procedure is used to set up multiple connections between REGIUS 170s connected to a CS-2 and to name each REGIUS 170. In this procedure, set the same content as was set for the standard JM.

1.

In the Service Tool screen, click the [Console] button and then in the “System” settings area click the [System Info] button. The SYSTEM INFO screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-49

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

2.

Select "System Config. (Reader)" from the list at the left side of the screen.

3.

In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if they are not already selected, select the “Registered” check boxes next to the "Reader 1" and “reader 2” entries.

4.

Click the "Model Name (Generic)" field and enter the generic name of the REGIUS 170.

5.

Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and “Reader 2” and enter the specific name of the REGIUS 170. These names are displayed in the System Status and Service Tool screens of the CS-2 application and allow users to select a specific REGIUS 170. Enter names that you can identify easily (for example, the name of the X-ray room where the REGIUS 170 is installed.) Example: X-ray Room No. 1, X-Ray Room No. 2, etc.

6-50

6.

Click [Save&Exit].

7.

In the “System” settings area, click the [Reader] button.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

8.

In the “System” settings area, click the [Reader] button. The CCU INFO screen appears. The display names of the REGIUS 170s you entered in Step 5 are displayed In the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen.

9.

From the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen, select the first REGIUS 170 device name.

10.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using uppercase letters, enter the host name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field. IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter this host name.

11.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using lowercase letters, enter the host name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field. IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to enter this host name.

12.

In the “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for the first REGIUS 170 set in the “IP Address” field. Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the above system.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-51

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

13.

From the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen, select the name of the second REGIUS 170.

14.

Repeat Steps 9-11 to enter the Host Name, Host Name (JM) and the IP Address for the second REGIUS 170.

15.

Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. The Service Tool (Reader) screen reappears.

Setting the network connection for the CS-2 itself

1.

Quit the Service Tool and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the REGIUS Service screen to display the Windows desktop.

2.

Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen and then select “Control Panel (C)” from the displayed menu.

3.

In the Control Panel, click the "Network and Internet Connections" icon.

6-52

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

4.

Click the "Network Connections" icon.

5.

Double-click "Local Area Connections".

6.

Click "Properties (P)".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-53

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6-54

7.

Double-click "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)".

8.

Set the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.

9.

Click [OK].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

10.

Click [OK].

Shutting down the system

1.

Left-click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.

2.

Left-click "Shut down Options (U)" from the Start menu.

3.

Left-click "Shut down (U)" from the displayed dialog. The CS-2 is turned OFF.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6-55

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

6-56

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7

Setting Up the System This section describes how to connect a luminance meter to adjust the brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit, the basics of connecting the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 to a network and how to install optional devices.

This page intentionally left blank.

7.1 Connecting a luminance meter

7.1 Connecting a luminance meter After installing the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 at the specified site, connect the liminance meter to adjust the CS-2 Operation Unit.

1.

Use the cable (LS-A12) to connect CS-2 COM1 and the luminance meter.

COM2

Communication port (default setting)

2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Set the switches of the luminance meter as follows. CALIBRATION

: PRESET

MEASURING MODE

: ABS

RESPONSE

: FAST

7-1

7.2 Connecting to the Network

7.2 Connecting to the Network This section discusses the basics of connecting the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 to a network.

7.2.1

Connecting the CS-2 to a Network The CS-2 is connected to a network hub using an Ethernet cable.

Hub (local network side) Ethernet board

RJ-45

7.2.2

Connecting the REGIUS 170 to a Network The REGIUS 170 is also connected to a hub using an Ethernet cable.

7.2.3

Verifying the Network Connection The following procedure is used to verify that each device is correctly connected to the network.

1.

Press the power switch of the CS-2 and start the CS-2. Wait for the initial screen of the CS-2 application to be shown.

2.

Press Operation switch of the REGIUS 170 to start.

3.

Check that “READY” is shown on each LCD after initialization. IMPORTANT If a network error is displayed on the LCD, the REGIUS 170 could not communicate with the JM.

“n” to “m” Connection

7-2

1.

Press the power switch to start the CS-2 with the standard JM.

2.

Check that the initial screen of the CS-2 application is displayed.

3.

Press the power switch of the CS-2 with the backup JM.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7.2 Connecting to the Network

4.

Check that the initial screen of the CS-2 application is displayed. IMPORTANT After the CS-2 application starts up, a popup message may appear that says, “Trouble occurred with the JM. Call for servicing. If there is a backup JM, switch to the backup JM.” If this message appears, the application could not communicate with the JM.

5.

Press Operation switch of the first REGIUS 170 to start.

6.

Check that “READY” is shown on the LCD after initialization.

7.

In a same manner, start the second and other REGIUS 170s in order, and check that “READY” is shown on each LCD. IMPORTANT If a network error is displayed on the LCD, the REGIUS 170 could not communicate with the JM.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7-3

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader For systems in which cassette registration is set during preregistration, add an optional bar code reader (single or multi) to the CS-2.

7.3.1

Assembling and Connecting the Bar Code Reader (Single) The system stand for the single bar code reader (single) can be placed on the desk or attached on the wall using screws. Discuss with the manager for the institute in advance, and install the stand where it is most convenient to read the cassette with the bar code reader.

1.

When a synapse cable, USB cable is not connected to the bar code reader (single), connect them following the figure below. Connect the larger side of the connector of the synapse cable to the bar code reader, and the smaller side to the USB converter cable.

Bar Code Reader (single) USB Cable

2.

7-4

Connector(L)

Remove the flynut from the neck of system stand.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

3.

Put the screw from the neck into the screw hole of the pedestal, and fix it using the flynut from the　bottom.

Holder

Neck

Pedestall

Flynut

4.

Set the bar code reader (single) in the holder of the system stand.

Holder

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7-5

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

5.

Connect the USB conversion cable to the USB port(Type A) located on the bottom surface and closer to the rear of the CS-2 Operation Unit . CS-2 Control Unit

USB connector

Bar code reader

6.

Adjust the angle of the neck of the system stand so that it is best suitable for reading the bar code.

How to fix the stand

1.

The sytem stand can be fixed on the desk, etc. using screws(2 pcs) or double-faced adhesive tape. The inner diameter of the screw hole of the pedestal is 5.5mm (0.22 in), and the fringe diameter is 10.75mm (0.43 in). To fix using the double-face adhesive tape, attach 3 pieces of strip (20.4 x 45.8mm) at 3 locations on the back of the pedestal as shown in the figure.

10.75mm Screw holes for fixing

5.5mm Position of double-sided tape (3 locations)

7-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

7.3.2

Connecting the Bar Code Reader (multiple) This type of bar code reader (multiple) can read the bar code despite of how the direction of the bar code is placed. The bar code reader can be placed on desk or fixed on the wall using screws. Discuss with the manager for the institute in advance, and install the stand where it is most convenient to read the cassette with the bar code reader.

1.

Plug the USB cable connector in the rear port of the bar code reader (multiple).

Multi bar code reader

USB cable

Connector

2.

Plug the USB cable in the USB connector port (Type A) located on the bottom back of the CS-2 Operation Unit.

• There are 4 USB connector ports (Type A) on the bottom back of the CS-2 Operation Unit. When there is no USB connector port available, pull out the port cover from the USB connector port on the right, and connect the cable here. CS-2 Control Unit

USB connector

Multi bar code reader

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7-7

7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

3.

Position the bar code reader (multiple) at the best convenient place for reading.

How to fix the bar code reader (multiple) on desk or wall

Follow the procedures below to fix the bar code reader (multiple) on desk or wall. Wooden screws for fixing are attached to the bar code reader (multiple).

1.

Fix the attached fixing plate on the surface using three wood screws Note the direction of laser irradiation, and fix the plate as illustrated below.

Wood screws

Fixing plate

Laser output direction

2.

Fix the base plate on the bottom back surface using flat-headed screws (4 pcs). Multi bar code reader

Flat-headed screws

Base plate

7-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8

Setting Up the CS-2 This section describes general procedures and settings required for installing the CS-2 in different facilities. For set up items listed on each set up screen and not described in this chapter, refer to Section 13, "Disassembly & Assembly".

This page intentionally left blank.

8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel

8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel IMPORTANT Calibration of the touch panel is required after the CS-2 is installed at the specified site.

1.

Start the CS-2 and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of how to open the REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [Start] at the lower right corner of the screen and select "All Programs (P)", "TouchWare" and "TouchWare", in that order.

3.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Click [Calibrate (C)].

8-1

8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel

4.

A calibration illustration apears at the lower left corner of the LCD screen. Use your finger to touch the illustration and keep touching until the display says "Touch Enable". IMPORTANT Do not use the pad of your finger to press the center of the X mark; instead use the tip. Match the height of the visual line to perform calibration with the visual line of the user to operate the CS-2.

IMPORTANT "HOLD" is displayed and then "Touch Enable".

5.

The calibration illustration appears on the lower right corner of the LCD screen. Touch the illustration as described in Step 4.

6.

The following warning screen appears. Follow the instructions and wait for the next screen.

7.

When the touch screen data is saved, the following screen appears. According to the instructions on the screen, check that the cursor follows when you move your finger, then click [Exit].

8-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel

8.

Click [Done].

9.

Click [Start] in the lower left hand corner of the screen and then click "Shutdown options (U)" from the displayed menu.

10.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Click [Restart (R)] to restart Windows.

8-3

8.2 Backing Up the Original Settings

8.2 Backing Up the Original Settings Before making various settings, you can save the system information on a floppy disk so that the original settings can be restored in case settings are made incorrectly.

1.

Start the CS-2 and start the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of how to open the REGIUS Service screen.

2.

In the Service Tool (Console) screen, click the [Backup] button. The Service Tool (Backup) screen appears.

3.

Click [System] of “System”. “System Setup File Save” screen appears.

8-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.2 Backing Up the Original Settings

4.

Click [>>]. All items in the left column will be listed in the right column.

5.

Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive slot.

6.

Click [Save]. “Browse for Folder” screen appears.

7.

Confirming that “3½ Floppy (A:)” is selected, click [OK]. A confirmation dialog appears.

8.

Click [Yes]. “Saving......” dialog appears.

9.

After confirming that saving has been completed, click [Exit] --> [Yes]. Switches to "Service Tool (Back Up)" screen.

10.

Back up the license file. Start Explorer and switch to C:\KonicaMinolta\CS-2\Env\System.

11.

From the displayed files, copy KddLicensed(.txt) to the floppy.

12.

When copy is completed, quit Explorer and remove the floppy.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-5

8.3 Setting the System Properties

8.3 Setting the System Properties Set properties essential to the general configuration of the system.

• In this paragraph, the setting that is essential at the time of installation is described. For the other system property settings, refer to Section 15, "Service Tool Screens".

8.3.1

Setting the Facility/Device Properties Input the information of facility and CS-2.

1.

Click the [Console] button in the Service Tool (Backup) screen. The Service Tool (Console) screen appears.

2.

Click [System Info.] of [System]. “SYSTEM INFO” screen appears.

3.

Enter the facility name and street address in the facility information field. The items input here will be printed as Stamp on the film. Input the Institution name, department in discussion with the system manager of Institution

8-6

4.

Select [Regius Info.] from the menu in the left column.

5.

Input the date of installation in “Y”, “M”, “D” fields of “Shipping Date”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.3 Setting the System Properties

8.3.2

Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer) Set the configuration of the host • printers that are connected to the CS-2.

1.

Select “System Configuration (Host, Printer)” from the menu on the left.

2.

Check the check box for “Registered” of “Host” as many as hosts that are connected to the CS-2. IMPORTANT Host 2 is optional. An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license or HOST Output Addition license is required to turn ON the "Registered" checkbox.

3.

Input the host name in the “Model” field for the host that is set to “Registered”.

4.

Check the check box for “Registered” next to the “Printer” field for the printers CS sends print data to.

5.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Input the printer name in “Model” of the host that is set to “Registered” .

8-7

8.3 Setting the System Properties

8.3.3

Setting the System Configuration (RIS) Set the RIS and options that will be connected to the CS-2.

1.

Select “System (RIS)” from the menu in the left.

2.

Check “Registered” of “RIS Config.(Patien/Study.)” according to the RIS configuration from which the CS-2 receives Patient/Study Info. IMPORTANT RIS (Patient/Study.) is optional. An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license or HOST Output Addition license is required to turn ON the "Registered" checkbox.

3.

Input the name in “Model” of the RIS that is set in the “Device Registered” field.

4.

Check the check box of “RIS (Result)” according to the RIS configuration to which the CS-2 sends the examination result. IMPORTANT RIS (Result) is optional. An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license or HOST Output Addition license is required to turn ON the "Registered" checkbox.

5.

Input in the “Model” box the name of the RIS that is checked as “Registered”.

6.

After completing input, click “Save & Exit” Confirmation dialog appears.

7.

Click “Yes”. Switches to “Service Tool” (Console) screen.

8-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.3 Setting the System Properties

8.3.4

Setting the appointment information Set essential appointment items.

1.

Select "Appointment Info." from the menu on the left.

2.

Set essential appointment items from the drop down menu for "Essential appointment item" of "Appointment". By default, it is set to "None".

8.3.5

Setting the Initial Screen This section describes how to set the initial screen (this is the starting screen for the routine work and is displayed the startup procedure is completed).

1.

Click [Screen Setting] of "System". The Screen Setting screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-9

8.3 Setting the System Properties

2.

Click [Localize] of "General Setup". The General Setup screen appears.

3.

In the Screen settings area, set the default screen from the Default Screen drop down menu. The factory setting is "Amendment screen".

4.

Click [Save & Exit]. A confirmation dialog appears.

5.

Click [Yes]. The Service Tool (Console) screen reappers.

8.3.6

Setting Density and Contrast Adjustment Amount Set the adjustment amount used when you touch the density and contrast fine adjustment button for the image confirmation screen.

1.

Click [Layout] of "System". The Screen Setting screen appears.

8-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.3 Setting the System Properties

2.

Click [Confirm image] of "Details". The Confirm Image screen appears.

3.

Set the adjustment amount used when you touch the fine adjustment button of density from the drop down menu of "S value adjustment amount" of "Image display/Image confirmation". The factory setting is "0.05".

4.

Set the adjustment amount used when you touch once the fine adjustment button of contrast from the drop down menu of "G value adjustment amount" of "Image display/Image confirmation". The factory setting is "0.05". IMPORTANT We recommend the following S and G value adjustment amount be used depending on the output device (printer, Viewer/Server) used in the institution.)

5.

S value adjustment

G value adjustment

Printer

0.02

0.02

Viewer/Server

0.05

0.05

Click [Save & Exit] A confirmation dialog appears.

6.

Click [Yes]. The Service Tool (Console) screen reppears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-11

8.4 Setting the Printer Information

8.4 Setting the Printer Information Make settings for connecting between the CS-2 and a printer.

1.

Click [Printer] of “Input/Output” in the Service Tool (Console) screen. “PRINTER INFO • Command” screen appears.

2.

From the menu on the upper left, select the category that will be set. The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.2, "Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer)".

3.

Select the printer type corresponding to the selected printer from the “Printer Type”. IMPORTANT Make sure that the printer type is selected.

4.

8-12

Set the “Commands” and “Printer” referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Presentation LUT

Selection of sending or not sending to the printer the LUT for equalizing the density between the monitor and printer output.

Status

According to the output printer, select from “OFF”, “NGET”, “N-EVENT-REPORT”, [N-GET+N-EVENTREPORT’.

Light intensity

Select the method for measuring light intensity

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.4 Setting the Printer Information

Items to be set

Properties to be set

Image processing

When presentation LUT is OFF; ･ D value output: Selected when a KonicaMinolta imager that does not support P value input is connected. ･ P value output: Selected when a KonicaMinolta imager that supports P value input is connected. When presentation LUT is ON; ･ D value output: Selected when an imager of other company is selected. ･ P value output: Do not use this setting. Note: When presentation LUT is ON, enter the values measured by the luminance meter to the "lighting" and "peripheral reflected light" fields in Section 15.6.7, "“PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen". Note: When the P value is ON, in addition to the above settings, set the P value recieeve setting for the imager and the "lighting" and "peripheral reflected light".

Icon

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Select the printer type. The selection here will be reflected upon ; ･ Decides the icon displayed in the “System Status” screen. ･ Decides the Dmax and Dmin of the printer.

8-13

8.4 Setting the Printer Information

5.

Select “Basic TCP/IP” in the lower left menu.

6.

Set “Basic TCP/IP” referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Host Name

Make sure to input the printer information in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

IP Address Port Number

8-14

Timeout 1

Set the time-out for the printer to wait the request signal from the CS-2.

Interval 1

Set the interval after the first transmission of the request signal when several request signals exist.

Interval 2

Set the interval for confirmation of the setting when the status acquisition is set to “N-GET” or “N-GET-REPORT” in Step 3.

7.

Select “Basic DICOM” in the lower left menu.

8.

Set “Basic DICOM” referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Transfer Syntax

Normally select the “Implicit VR Little Endian. ･ See Section 15.6.4, ""PRINTER INFO • Basic DICOM” Screen".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.4 Setting the Printer Information

Items to be set

Properties to be set

Printer AE-Title

Make sure to input the printer properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

Regius AE-Title

9.

PDU Size

Normally use the default.

Version Name

Displays the implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”. ･ Unable to change

UID

Displays “304.@”. ･ Unable to change

Character Set

Normally use the default.

Private Date

Normally select "Send".

When “N-EVENT-REPORT” is selected for Step 3 “Command”

--

>“Status Acquisition” , select “N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” and “NEVENT-REPORT DICOM” in the lower menu column, and configure settings by referring to Steps 5 and 7.

• Clicking [Import] displayed on the bottom right of the screen will initiate copying the setting made in Step 5 and 7.

10.

After completing input, click [Save & Exit]. Confirmation dialog appears.

11.

Click [Yes]. Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-15

8.5 Setting the Host Information

8.5 Setting the Host Information Configure various settings for the connection of the host.

• When the host is the device of another manufacturer, Configure the setting following the instruction provided by that manufacture. Beside images are sent in DICOM protocol and it is possible to send JPEG images, etc. to an electronic medical record system via another manufacturer's gateway (ID-680SAN module) mounted on the CS-2. An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license is required to use another manufacturer's gateway. In addition, a Host Output Addition license is required to send images to two locations using DICOM protocol.

1.

Click [HOST] of [Input/Output] on the Service Tool (Console) screen. “HOST INFO•Command” setting screen appears.

2.

From the menu in the upper left, select the host type that will be set. The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.2, "Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer)".

3.

Select the host type corresponding to the selected host from the “Host Type” . IMPORTANT Make sure that the host type is selected.

4.

8-16

Set the “Command” referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Gateway to Others

To use the gateway program (protocol other than DICOM), set to “ON”. When "ON" is set, ID-680SAN module is used.

Image IOD

Select the type of image data sent to the host depending on the desgination host.

Storage Commitment

Select “ON” when communicating with the Host with regard to the Storage Commitment service.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.5 Setting the Host Information

Items to be set

Properties to be set

GSPS

Select “ON” when communicating with the host with regard to the GSPS service.

Photometric

Select the method of measuring light intensity.

Image Processing

Select the method to process images to be sent to the host.

5.

Select “C-STORE TCP/IP” from the menu in the lower column.

6.

Set “TCP/IP” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Host Name

Make sure to input the host properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

IP Address Port Number

7.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Timeout 1

Set the time-out of duration before the CS-2 receives the response from the host against the request signal. ･ Default: 60000

Interval 1

Set the interval after the first transmission of the request signal when several request signals exist. ･ Default: 10000

Select “C-STORE DICOM” from the menu in the lower column.

8-17

8.5 Setting the Host Information

8.

Set “DICOM” by referring to the table below. Items to be set Transfer Syntax

Normally select the implicit VR little endian.

HOST AE-Title

Make sure to input the titles in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

CS-2 AE-Title

9.

Properties to be set

PDU Size

Normally use the default. ･ Default: 65536

Version Name

Displays implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”. ･ Unable to change

UID

Displays UID “304.@”. ･ Unable to change

Character Set

Specify the character set of the transmission data according to the host. ･ ACSII : Alphanumericals ･ Latin1 : Alphanumericals including Latin alphabet.

Private Data

Select whether to send the private data or not.

DataSet Extension

Normally leave it to “OFF”. ･ Refer to Section 15.7.4, "“HOST INFO • CSTORE DICOM” Screen".

VR Check

Checks if the syntax complies with DICOM standard. If it does not comply, prohibits the data from being sent. Set it to “ON” if the other manufacturer’s HOST can not accept the data that does not comply with DICOM.

When “Storage+Storage Commitment” is selected for “SOP Class” in Step 3, “Command”, select “N-ACTION TCP/IP”, “N-ACTION DICOM”, “N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP”, and “N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” in order from the lower left menu and Configure the setting described in Steps 5 and 7.

• Clicking [Import] displayed on the bottom right of the screen will initiate copying the setting made in step.5 and 7.

8-18

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.5 Setting the Host Information

10.

Select “Image” in the lower left menu.

11.

Configure settings for the image by referring to the table below. Items to be set

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Properties to be set

Image Reduction Mode

Select the compression type when the image is sent compressed. (default : SINC method) ･ Spline ･ Decimate/Crop ･ Bilinear ･ SINC method If the default setting causes trouble, consult the manufacturer for instruction.

Mag Request Mode

Set the magnification from the following: ･ Magnify ･ Scale to fit ･ True size

Printer (Sync.)

Select whether to reflect printer output conditions (image processing, overlay, etc.) to the HOST output for each item. ･ will be reflected to the output to the HOST. ･ Default: “E/F’H Process”, “Masking (Out of Shutter) and “Masking(Side of Chest)” are ON, and the rest is OFF.

8-19

8.5 Setting the Host Information

12.

Select “Output setting” in the lower left menu.

13.

Set “Output Setting” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

14.

8-20

Properties to be set

Queue

Select an action when an error occurs during queue printing. ･ ON: Skips the queue that incurred an error, and print the next queue. ･ OFF: Suspends printing of next queue until the error is reset.

SOP Instance ID (multihosts)

Since the setting varies depending on the operation at the institute or host, setting should be made according to the instruction.

Storage Committment

Since the setting varies depending on the operation at the institute or host, setting should be made according to the instruction.

Select "Output number of pixels" from the lower left menu.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.5 Setting the Host Information

15.

Set "Output number of pixels" according to the following table. Items to be set

16.

Properties to be set

Resolution

･ ･ ･

175µm (standard) 87.5µm (high resolution) 43.75µm (options)

Output Pixel Size

･ ･ ･ ･

Same as input 87.5µm 175µm 350µm

After completing input, click [Save & Exit]. Confirmation dialog appears.

17.

Click [Yes]. Switches to "Service Tool” (Console) screen. IMPORTANT When another manufacturer's gateway is set to "ON", the ID-680SAN module must be set. When the CS-2 is restarted, [Gateway] is displayed in Option" of the Service Tool (Console) screen. The ID-680SAN module can be set using [Gateway]. For details about setting, refer to Section 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-21

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

8.6 Setting the RIS Information How to set the RIS information varies depending on the system operation or system configuration at each facility. In this paragraph, how to configure the setting when the RIS is individually assigned to the patient/study and result as described in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the System Configuration (RIS)". In addition to directly obtaining patient information/study information in DICOM protocol, it is possible to obtain information from medial or electronic medical record systems via another manufacturer's gateway (ID-680SAN module). An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license is required to connect RIS.

8.6.1

Setting Patient/Study Set the operational properties when the CS-2 acquires the patient data from the RIS.

1.

Click [RIS] of “Input/Output” of “Service Tool” (Console) screen. “RIS Type” screen appears.

• It will not be displayed if only either of Patient/Study or Result is registered.

2.

Click [Patient/Exam] --> [OK]. “RIS INFO” screen appears.

8-22

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

3.

Select the RIS name that will be set from the menu in the upper left column. The names shown here are those set in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the System Configuration (RIS)".

4.

Set “Command” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Gateway to Others

Select “ON” when using any gateway program (program other than DICOM). When "ON" is set, perform the settings described in Section 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".

Service Class

Select “Detached” or “MWM”. ･ Upon selection of “MWM”, an icon on the right appears on the “Exam Search” screen of the CS-2 application, and enables the operator to touch it to initiate search of the patient data from the patient database stored in RIS/IDS. ･ The user can search patient information in the External patient/Examination DB by touching this key.

• Selecting “MWM” will add set items for “MWM” in the left menu.

5.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Select “TCP/IP” in the menu on the lower right column.

8-23

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

6.

Set “TCP/IP” by referring to the table below. Items to be set Host Name IP Address

Properties to be set Make sure to input the RIS properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

Port Number Timeout 1

Sets the time-out of duration before the RIS replies to the data request sent from CS-2. ･ Change the setting if the default causes problem.

Timeout 2

Among the settings of time-out of duration before the RIS replies to the data request sent from CS-2, this particularly set the time-out before the CS-2 receives the patient/examination data from RIS. ･ Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to “MWM”.

Interval 1

Sets the interval when implementing the auto-search of the patient data. ･ Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to “MWM”.

7.

Select “DICOM” in the menu in the lower left column.

8.

Set “DICOM” by referring to the table below. Items to be set Transfer Syntax

Normally select the implicit VR little endian. When the “Service Class” is set to “Detached”, unable to set this item.

RIS AE-Title

Make sure to input the printer properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

CS-2 AE-Title

8-24

Properties to be set

PDU Size

Normally use the default.

Version Name

Displays the implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”. ･ Unable to change.

UID

Displays UID “304.@”. ･ Unable to change.

Character Set

Normally use the default.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

9.

When “Service Class” is set to “Detached” in Step 4, select “Detached” from the lower left menu.

•

10.

11.

When it is set to “MWM”, proceed to Step 11.

Set “Detached” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Auto Exam. Start

Select “ON”, when automatically start examination upon receiving an appointement in the initial screen.

When “Service Class” is set to “MWM” in Step 4, select “MWM” from the lower left menu.

12.

Set “MWM” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Search

Set the condition to search Exam/Patient Information from the RIS.

Exam Tag

Select the method to convert the RIS study code to the CS-2 exam tag. Also writes or reads the conversion table in or from the file.

Refer to Section 16.3, "How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table" for a description of procedure used to create the exam tag conversion table. CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-25

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

13.

After completing input, click “Save & Exit”. Confirmation dialogue will be shown.

14.

Click [Yes].

Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen. When MWM is selected

Items used as the search condition in the patient information screen or characters that can be entered depend on the settings in the server (patient information database). When you select “MWM” for “Service Class”, check with the system administrator and inform the user as to the search method. IMPORTANT When another manufacturer's gateway is set to "ON", the ID-680SAN module must be set. When the CS-2 is restarted, [Gateway] is displayed in Option" of the Service Tool (Console) screen. The ID-680SAN module can be set using [Gateway]. For details about setting, refer to Section 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".

8.6.2

Setting the Result Configure the settings for sending the examination result from the CS2 to the RIS.

1.

Click [RIS]. “Ris Type” screen appears.

• It will not be displayed if only either of Patient/Study or Result is registered.

8-26

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

2.

Click [Result] > [OK]. “RIS INFO” screen appears.

3.

Select the RIS name that will be set in the upper left menu. The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the System Configuration (RIS)".

4.

Set the “Command” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Gateway to Others

Fixed to “OFF” when using the gateway program (protocol other than DICOM).

Service Class

Select “Detached” or “Performed Procedure Step (MPPS)”.

• Menu items in the lower left column change in accordance with the selection of "Service Class".

5.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Select “TCP/IP” in the lower left menu.

8-27

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

6.

Set “TCO/IP” by referring to the table below. Items to be set Host Name IP Address

Properties to be set Make sure to input the RIS properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

Port Number Timeout 1

Set the time-out of duration before the CS-2 receives the response from the RIS against the request signal. Change only when a problem is observed by default.

Interval 1

Use the default.

7.

Select “DICOM” in the menu in the lower left column.

8.

Set “DICOM” by referring to the table below. Items to be set Transfer Syntax

Normally select the implicit VR little endian. When the “Service Class” is set to “Detached”, unable to set this item.

RIS AE-Title

Make sure to input the printer properties in discussion with the system manager of the facility.

CS-2 AE-Title

8-28

Properties to be set

PDU Size

Normally use the default.

Version Name

Displays the implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”. Unable to change.

UID

Displays UID “304.@”. Unable to change.

Character Set

Normally use the default.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

9.

When “Service Class” is set to “Detached” in Step 4, select “Detached” from the lower left menu.

• When it is set to [MPPS] , proceed to Step 11.

10.

Set “Detached” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

11.

Properties to be set

Patient DB Registration

Select whether to register the patient info that is changed on the CS in the DB of RIS. • ON: Patient info changed on the CS will also be registered in the patient DB of RIS. • OFF: Only patient info that is newly input on the CS will be registered in the patient DB of RIS.

Notify [Completed Study]

Check “ON” to notify the RIS of completion of the study. (default: OFF)

When “Service Class” is set to “MPPS” in Step 4, select “MPPS” from the lower left menu.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-29

8.6 Setting the RIS Information

12.

13.

Set “MPPS” by referring to the table below. Items to be set

Properties to be set

Send

Select from the following options: None Sending: Sends only the exposure start signal. After Image Confirmed: Sends when [OK] button is clicked on the “Exposed Image Confirmation” screen. After Output completed: Sends when the output to the host or printer is completed.

Send Exposure Dose

Cannot be set

Send as Cancel

Cannot be set

Send Exam Body Part

Check "ON" to send the exam tag altered on the CS-2 to the RIS. (default : ON) ･ Enabled when “MPPS” is selected in “Service Class”.

Continue on Other CS-2

Cannot be set

Send Film Consumption

Check “ON” to send the film consumption (sheets) to the RIS. (default: ON)

Send Study Deletion

Check “ON” to delete the examination from reser-vation list on the RIS when it is deleted on the “Exam List” screen .(default: ON)

Issue SOP Instance UID

Usually this item is kept to “ON”.

After completing input, click “Save & Exit”. Confirmation dialog appears.

14.

Click [Yes]. Switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

8-30

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.7 Setting the Stamps

8.7 Setting the Stamps Set this item when the user requests that the format be changed. Usually, use five default formats as shown below. Default format

1.

Click [Stamp] of “Overlay” in the Service Tool (Console) screen. The Set Stamp screen appears.

IMPORTANT Do not deselect the "Valid/Invalid" checkbox.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-31

8.7 Setting the Stamps

2.

Select the destination and stamp number that shall be enabled. Items to be set Stamp No

Properties to be set ･ ･ ･

3.

There are five formats for printer and host in common. The stamp No. that is enabled will be also available on the CS-2 application. To use the existing stamp setting, click the stamp No. on the “Copy” screen to copy its setting.

Select “Stamp Format” on the Screen Selection menu, and click [Edit]. “Stamp Format” appears.

4.

Set the stamp details by referring to the table below. Items

Properties

Lines

Input the number of lines for stamp. (1~6 lines)

Length

Input the width (mm) where the stamp is displayed.

Line Height

Input the height (mm) of character for each line.

Alignment

Select from Left-Justify and Center(default).

[Reload]

Displays the sample of current setting. Use this to check the setting when changed.

[Preview]

Displays the sample in bit map. Use this to check the character size, etc.

CAUTION

8-32

“Lines”, “Length” and “Line Height” can be set independently. Therefore, it may happen that the character line does not fit to the stamp area depending on the setting. For those items such as “Patient Name”, “Patient ID”, etc. that are not fixed in character count, check that all characters presuming the longest can fit to the stamp area.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.7 Setting the Stamps

5.

After completing the change of display setting, click [OK] > [YES]. The screen switches to “Stamp” setting screen.

• Click [Cancel] > [Yes] to leave the setting unchanged.

6.

Select [Detail] from “Edit Screen” menu, and click [Edit]. “Set Stamp” appears.

7.

Configure the stamp settings by referring to the table below. Items

Setting

No. (1~60)

Select Enable/Disable for each item. The item not selected (disabled) will not show on the screen. ･ The items on No.41 onward is for setting of special characters. Specially for imputing the title, etc.

Item

Select the item from drop down menu. (refer to A-2 Stamp Item Selection List, p.444).

Position Row

Specifies the starting line of display (vertical) by line (line counts from the top).

Position Column

･ ･ ･

Length

Specify the display width of item by number of characters.

Options

Select the display type when “Free-Selection for Each Item” is selected for “Specified Name display”in Step4 . (refer to Section 16.2, "Stamp Item Selection List").

Sample String

･

･

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Specifies the starting raw of display (horizontal) by raw (character counts from the left end). When several items are set for one line, the item with lesser numbers input will be displayed on the left. When several items are specified by the same number, the items with lesser No. will be displayed on the left.

No.1~40: Input the sample characters in each item that shall be exhibited on sample display(Reload) and bit map(Preview) display. No.41~60: Input the characters free from the item, which will displayed on the stamp.

8-33

8.7 Setting the Stamps

8.

After completing the change of each item, click [Exit] --> [YES]. The screen switches to “Stamp” setting screen.

• Click [Cancel] --> [Yes] to leave the setting unchanged.

9.

After completing input, click [Save & Exit]. The confirmation dialog appears.

10.

Click [Yes].

• Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen.

8-34

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.8 Configuring the Gateway

8.8 Configuring the Gateway When "Gateway to Others" is set to "ON" during the procedures in Sections 8.5, "Setting the Host Information" or 8.6, "Setting the RIS Information", you must set up the ID-680SAN module. IMPORTANT “Gateway to the Others” in “RIS INFO” is the optional function, and needs “CS-1/3 Electronic Medical Recording System Interface License” to enable the “Gateway to the Others” by ticking “ON”. Set it to “ON” only for those CS2s for which the license was acquired.

1.

Exit Service Tool and click [Restart] in the REGIUS Service screen.

2.

When the CS-2 starts up, start Service Tool from the system menu.

3.

Click [Gateway] of "Option" in the Service Tool (Console) screen. The Gateway to Others main menu screen appears.

• Setting of image information linkage (host side): Storage controller setting

• Setting of patient information linkage (RIS side): MWM controller setting IMPORTANT [Gateway] button will appear only after enabling “Gateway to the Others” in “RIS INFO” followed by termination of the Service Tool.

4.

Refer to Section 8.9, "Recommended Setting by Maker/Product" for details of how to configure settings.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-35

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product 8.9.1

Maker/Product Relation Table Patient information linkage

•

Maker

Product

Sanyo Medicom

Newve

BML

Medical Station

Toshiba

MEPIO

With regard to linkage with makers other than the above, confirm details on the KonicaMinolta MI common portal site.

•

For patient information linkage with SRL Doctor's Desk II, the linkage module is added to the Doctor's Desk II side and ID-680SAN module is not used.

8.9.2

Patient Information Linkage For the following items, use the default value. Sanyo Medicom Newve 2B!

=TfeT A8B8=5>C2?8? Š7^bc=P\T Š8?0SSaTbb

" B>2:4C 2^\\d]XRPcX^] D_^]bTPaRWUa^\ cWT2B!83%' B0=aT`dTbcbcWT cPaVTc_PcXT]cX]U^ c^cWT=TfeT cWa^dVWB>2:4C R^\\d]XRPcX^]

83%'B0= <^Sd[T !
 382>< <
2B! 0__[XRPcX^]

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

8-36

Gateway to Others

Fixed to "ON"

Service Class

Fixed to "MWM"

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting] MWM setting

MWM setting Requesting side AE-Title

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".

AE-Title for recep- Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) tion DICOM screen "RIS AE-Title”. Port Number for reception

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

Receipt Computer Initial value of Newve. Change the setting if Sanyo Medicom requests so at the time of installation.

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Host Name

Fixed to “LOCALHOST”

IP Address

Fixed to “127.0.0.1”

8-37

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

BML Medical Station 2B! 83%'B0=<^Sd[T

" 382><
 2^_XTbcWTUX[T 5C? 0ccWTaTVXbcaPcX^] ^U_PcXT]cX]U^Qh
?PcXT]c31

G<;^a1<; 3^Rd\T]cb FWT]G<;1<; U^a\PcUX[TXb [^RPcTSX]cWT R^\\^]U^[STa 83%'B0=bcPacb P]P[hbXb^UcWT UX[TcWT]aTVXbcTab cWTUX[T^]cWT 83%'B0=31

BTPaRWcWT _PcXT]cX]U^Ua^\ cWT2B!dbX]V 382><
2B! 0__[XRPcX^]

A468DB (

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

Gateway to Others

Fixed to "ON"

Service Class

Fixed to "MWM"

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting]

MWM setting

8-38

Requesting side AE-Title

Set the value s3et in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/StudyPatient/Study) DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".

AE-Title for reception

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.

Port Number for reception

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen

Host Name

Fixed to “LOCALHOST”

IP Address

Fixed to “127.0.0.1”

•

According to the following procedure, share the C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of the CS-2.

Sharing the FTP folder

1.

Finish maintenance of the CS-2 and go back to the desktop screen.

2.

Start Windows Explorer and go to C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN_E.

3.

Right-click the FTP folder and select “Sharing and Security”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-39

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

4.

Select both “Share this folder on the network” and “Permit change of the file by the network user” checkboxes in the items related to sharing and security on the network.

8-40

5.

Click [OK].

6.

Check that the FTP folder icon is as shown below.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

Toshiba MEPIO

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

Gateway to Others

Fixed to "ON"

Service Class

Fixed to "MWM"

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting]

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-41

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

[Network Common Folder Auto Log-in Setting] MWM setting Requesting side AETitle

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/ Study) DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".

AE-Title for reception

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/ Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.

Port Number for reception

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/ Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen

Host Name

Fixed to “LOCALHOST”

IP Address

Fixed to “127.0.0.1”

•

According to the procedure described in page 42, “Sharing the FTP Folder”, share the C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of the CS-2.

8-42

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

General IF

There are two types of general IF. One is maker-independent MWM type (search from CS-2) and the other is a DETACHED type (register with CS-2 from electronic chart, etc.).

General IF DETACHED type

2B! 83%'B0=<^Sd[T 4[TRca^]XR

?PcXT]cX]U^cWPcbW^d[SQTR^]ca^[[TSQh cWTT[TRca^]XR\TSXRP[aTR^aSbhbcT\Xb caP]bU^a\TSc^PUX[T_dabdP]cc^cWT :^]XRP<X]^[cPbcP]SPaS5C?UX[TU^a\Pc P]SbT]cc^cWT83%'B0=eXPR^\\^] U^[STa83%'B0=bT]Sb_^[[X]VbXV]P[c^ cWTR^\\^]U^[STa

2^_XTb :^]XRP<X]^[cP BcP]SPaS5C?5X[T

9?468\PVT

D_^]aTRTX_c^U  _TaU^a\b 3TcPRWTS R^\\d]XRPcX^]c^ cWT2B!

< BC>A064

2^\\^]5X[T 8=?0C84=C 5X[T

2^\\^]5X[T

! 382><3TcPRWTS BTaeXRT2[Pb

# 2^_XTbcWT5X[T

?PcXT]c31

BC>A064 2^]ca^[[Ta

>dc_dcbcWTTgP\ SPcPX\PVT^UcWT cPaVTc_PcXT]cX] 9?46U^a\Pcc^ cWTcTa\X]P[^UcWT T[TRca^]XR\TSXRP[ aTR^aSbhbcT\X] _aX]RX_[TB0= \PRWX]TbPaT]^c dbTSc^bc^aTcWT X\PVTb

2B! 0__[XRPcX^]

A468DB (

BcPacbcWTTgP\ QPbTS^]cWT TgP\SPcPcWPc cWT2B! aTRTXeTb >dc_dcbcWT 382><X\PVTc^ cWT83%'B0=

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Gateway to Others

Fixed to "ON"

Service Class

Fixed to “Detached”

8-43

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting]

Detached setting Sending side AE-Title

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen “RIS AETitle”.

Receiving side AE-Title

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen “REGIUS AE-TITLE".

Receiving side IP Address

Fixed to “127.0.0.1”

Receiving side Port Number

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen

Host Name IP Address

8-44

Not used

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

General IF MWM type

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

Gateway to Others

Fixed to "ON"

Service Class

Fixed to "MWM"

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting]

MWM setting HOST AE-Title

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.

CS-2 AE-Title

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".

Port Number

Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen

Host Name

Fixed to LOCALHOST

IP Address

Fixed to 127.0.0.1

•

According to the procedure described in the section titled Sharing the FTP folder in this section, share the C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of the CS-2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

8-45

8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

8-46

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9

Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit

This page intentionally left blank.

9.1 Required Items

9.1 Required Items • Luminance meter (Konica Minolta LS-100) • Luminance meter cable (LS-A12) • Chest front image

9.2 Preparation Perform the following procedure by waiting for more than 20 minutes after turning ON the monitor.

9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics 1. 2.

Click [Adjustment] in the Service Tool screen. Click [Brightness]. The monitor calibration software starts up.

3.

Click [Option setting]. The Option setting screen appears.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9-1

9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics

4.

Check that the Method setting is set to “Auto mode” and the Display Reflection Luminance Measurement is set to “No” and then click the [Exit] button.

5.

Click [1] Measure Monitor characteristics]. The Auto mode screen appears.

6.

Move the Auto mode screen so that the target (black square) of Auto mode is in the center of CS-2 LCD.

9-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics

7.

While pressing the F button of the luminance meter, turning ON the power switch of the luminance meter.

8.

Check that display of the luminance meter indicates "cd/m2C".

• Check that there is "C" after "cd/m2".

9.

Keep 1 m distance from the CS-2 LCD and set the focus to the target on the CS-2 LCD while looking at the luminance meter.

• Focus of the luminance meter is not completed if the distance is less than 1 m.

• If it is difficult to set the focus to the center of the target, set the focus to the fringe of the target and then measure the center of the target. IMPORTANT Depending on the viewing angle, the brightness of the LCD differs. Therefore, adjust the angle of the CS-2 LCD to the actual angle that the user uses while looking at the LCD. Also, match the position of the luminance meter to the visual line of the user when he/she looks at the CS-2 LCD. IMPORTANT Check for reflected images in the target of the Auto mode screen. Since light colors items such as white paper and white objects near the CS-2 LCD can cause reflected image, keep them away from the CS-2 LCD. Also, if someone passes behind the CS-2 LCD during measurement, the image may change. Therefore, be sure not to change the environment during measurement.

10.

Click the [Start] button.

• Brightness of target increases gradually.(dark → bright) • Measurement value of the luminance meter is transferred to CS-2. • After the measurement value is transferred, the CALIB.CRT and CALIB_S.CRT files in "C:\konicaMinolta\CS-2\Env\Manage\Crt_Lut" are updated.

11.

When the Auto mode screen goes away, check that no error is indicated.

12.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Turn OFF the luminance meter.

9-3

9.4 Creating the Monitor LUT

9.4 Creating the Monitor LUT Create a LUT based on the measured display luminance characteristics.

1.

Click [2. LUT making for the display]. The “LUT making for the display” dialog appears.

2.

Click [GSDF conversion(P value)] radio button.

• Selecting the conversion method Conversion method application

Application

GSDF conversion (Input: P value)

Default (recommended)

Brightness linear conversion (Input: P value)

［GSDF conversion (Input:P value)] is used when the monitor screen is bright

Linear

Not used with CS-2

Brightness linear conversion (Input: P value) requires entering of Light box luminance L0, Reflection from film La, Dmax and Dmin. For details, refer to Section 9.6, "Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)".

3.

Click the [Convert/Save] button. The output designation setting screen for the monitor LUT appears.

9-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.4 Creating the Monitor LUT

4.

From the pull-down menu, select the ch you want to use.

5.

Click [OK]. The monitor LUT is created and the screen returns to the "LUT making for the display" dialog.

6.

Repeat the step.3. and 4. to select all devices for which you desire to output the Monitor LUT.

7.

Check that error display is not indicated and repeat Steps 3 to 5 until a monitor LUT is created for all channels.

• Files such as P_1.lut, H_1.lut reside in the HDD of CS-2 will be updated.

• The P_1.lut and H_1.lut files in "C:\konicaMinolta\CS2\Env\Manage\Crt_Lut" are updated. File naming rules are as follows.

8.

P_a.lut

a: Printer channel number

H_b.lut

b: Host channel number

Click[Exit]. The Monitor Calibration Software dialog reappears.

9.

Click[Exit]. The Service Tool screen reappears.

10.

Close the Service Tool and click [Shutdown] in the REGIUS Service screen.

11.

When the power of the CS-2 is turned OFF, unplug the cable (LS-A12) and then turn ON the power of the CS-2.

• Until the CS-2 application restarts, the new monitor LUTs are not reflected.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9-5

9.5 Confirmation

9.5 Confirmation 9.5.1

Restoring test image

1. 2.

Prepare "REGIUS CONSOLE CS-2 TEST IMAGES (SMPTE Pattern)". In the Service Tool screen, select tghe "Restore" tab and click the "Image" button.

3. 4.

Click the "Browse..." button in the Restore image file screen. Select a file and click the "Restore" button. IMPORTANT

Ｐ value images (images in the typeP170image folder) are used to check host output and D value images (image in the typeD170image folder) are used to check imager output.

IMPORTANT Image processing parameters are "Basic LUT = LIN-01, S value= 293, G value= 1.0, E/F/G/H processing is OFF". IMPORTANT Do not change the processing parameters for the restored image.

9.5.2

Checking Gradation on the host output

1.

Send the SMPTE pattern image (images in the typeP170image folder) of the P value from the CS-2 to the host.

2.

Display the sent image on the CS-2 and received image on the host to compare the gradation. Check that the result is as follows.

• Gray-scale on the displayed image must look the same on the CS-2 • •

•

9-6

and host. Either on the CS-2 and host, the contrast of each step of gray-scale must look equally spaced. The area that is written as "95/100%" at the center of the test image (there is a 95% density area in the 100% density area) must be identifiable when looking at the CS-2 monitor. (The 95% area must not be the same as the 100% area). There is an area where a 100% density area to 80% density area are arranged in a line vertically in the SMPTE image on the CS-2 monitor. The difference in gradation in this area must be identifiable. (These three gradation sections must not be seen the same way.)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.5 Confirmation

Use the following table to check with regard to the addition explanation by setting. HOST Info. setting GSPS

Image processing

Additional explanation

OFF

No processing (Connected to KonicaMinolta)

Set the display LUT of the reception host must be as follows. ・ GP processing host: GSDF conversion (Input P value) ・ GP processing host: GSDF conversion (Input D value)

OFF

D value processing (Connected to other)

Usually images look different when the reception host performs special gradation processing. (The overall monitor display of the reception host looks whiter than the CS-2 monitor display )

OFF

P value processing (Connected to other)

The images look very close on the two sides. Even though the reception host does not support GSDF, images look the same.

ON

P value processing (Connected to other)

(When GSPS is set to ON, Image Processing is fixed to P value processing (Connected to other) and Photometric fixed to monochrome 2).

Display LUT of the host shall use GSDF conversion (Input P value) in all cases. IMPORTANT When the host images are whiter than CS-2 images, change the image processing setting from D value output to P value output.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9-7

9.5 Confirmation

9.5.3

Checking Gradation in Printer Output

1.

Send the SMPTE pattern image (image under the typeD170image folder) for D value from the CS-2 to the imager.

2.

Compare the film and image on the monitor. IMPORTANT Always use Light box. Since the result differs depending on the setting, check the result (confirmed items) according to the following table.

Printer Info. setting GSDF

Image processing

Imager P value receive setting

OFF

D value output

OFF

OFF

ON

P value output

D value output

ON

OFF

Film density

Result ( confirmed item)

Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.

Other than Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It does not look the same on the monitor and film.

Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.

Other than Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.

Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.

Other than Dmax3.0

・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being linear. (Reference: Density value is linear) ・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.

In any of the cases in the above table, gray-scale on the monitor is not visually seen as being linear. The phrase "not visually seen as being linear" means that the 100% and 95% areas cannot be differentiated or three areas from 100% to 80% look the same. IMPORTANT When the result is not as described in the table, try calibrating the imager.

9-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.6 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)

9.6 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value) The following screen appears when [Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value) is selected in the "LUT making for the display" dialog for the monitor. Enter the following four parameters.

Use the following method to measure the Light Box luminance L0 and Reflection from film La.

1.

Turn On the luminance meter and check that the display is [cd/m2]. Check that [cd/m2] is not followed by "C".

2. 3.

Turn On the Light Box. Stay 1m away from the light box and set the focus of the luminance meter to the surface of the light box. IMPORTANT Focusing is not completed if the distance is shorter than 1m. IMPORTANT Set the height of the luminance meter at the level at which the user actually looks at the light box.

4.

Press the luminance meter measuring button. When the measuring button is released, the displayed measured value is held. This value becomes the light box luminance L0.

5.

Turn Off the light box and set the exposure film. IMPORTANT Make the room brightness as close as possible to the conditions under which the user actually usse the system and measure the high density image part.

6.

Set the focus of the luminance meter to the surface of the film and press the measuring button of the luminance meter. The displayed measured value is the Reflection from film La.

7.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Turn the luminance meter power OFF.

9-9

9.6 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)

9-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10

Verifying and Backing Up Setup Data Reading the solid density image, check that the image read by the cassette reader is free from any defect. Then, back up the set up data, and complete the installation work.

This page intentionally left blank.

10.1 Checking the Image

10.1 Checking the Image Reading the exposed solid density by REGIUS 170, check the image using test tools. IMPORTANT Refer to the CS-2 Operation Manual for operation of the Image Confirmation and Examination Registration screens.

1.

Press the power button, and start the CS-2. CS-2 application starts, and the initial screen will be shown.

2.

Press the operation button, and start the REGIUS 170 to be checked.

3.

On the CS-2 Operation Unit, input dummy patient information for image checking purposes and go to the Image Confirmation screen.

4.

Touch the square (Other) in the lower left corner of the body part diagram and touch [TEST].

5.

Expose the test cassette to produce solid density.

• Bulb Voltage - 80kV, 10mAs / Distance - 2m • Align the long side of the cassette with the vertical direction of the X-ray bulb.

6.

When the system is set to “Pre-registration”, the bar code of the cassette taken by the bar code reader is read. When it is set to “Preregistration”, the bar code of the cassette is displayed in the order. When it is set to “Post-registration”, “1st” is indicated. Nothing is displayed when “Auto-registration” is set.

7.

Insert the cassette into the REGIUS 170. As the image in the cassette is read, the image is displayed on the screen of operation unit.

8. CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

［Touch [OK].

10-1

10.1 Checking the Image

9.

Touch [Exam. Completed].

10.

Returns to the initial screen.

11.

Touch [KonicaMinolta]. System menu will be shown.

12.

Touch [Utilities] to start the “Service Tool”.

13.

Touch [Analyze]. “Analyze” screen will be shown.

14.

Click [Image]. Image-check software will start.

10-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10.1 Checking the Image

15.

Select [Open (O)] in the [File (F)] menu. [Open] dialogue will be shown.

16.

Select “1.img”, and touch [Open]. Solid density image that is read by the REGIUS 170 will be displayed on the screen of image-check software.

• Select the latest file(with the largest number) if several image file is listed in the “Open File” dialogue.

17.

Select [Density • Contrast (C)] in the [Display (V)] menu. "Contrast" screen will be shown.

18.

“Select [Profile(Horizontal) (S)] in the [Analysis (A)] menu.“Horizontal Profile” screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10-3

10.1 Checking the Image

19.

Adjust the slider bar so that the difference between “Black” and “White” on the “Contrast” screen becomes approximately 400 steps.

20.

Drag the slider of the “Center” to right and left so that the unevenness of the image becomes most evident.

21.

Using a yellow cross cursor, select the entire image tracing its border.

22.

Horizontal profile of the area that is enclosed by the cross cursor will be displayed on the “Horizontal Profile” screen.

10-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10.1 Checking the Image

23.

Check that the horizontal profile is almost flat. If the image correction is not appropriate, this horizontal profile curve will show a mountain shape. ex) Profile with no correction.

24.

Select [Exit (X)] in the [File (F)] menu. Closing all windows, and returns to the “Service Tool” screen.

25.

In a same manner, check the image read by the rest of all REGIUS 170s. If a steep slope or winding is found in the horizontal profile, it may mean there is an abnormality on the REGIUS 170. Take necessary action by referring to the REGIUS 170 Service Manual.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10-5

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data After completing the image check of the REGIUS 170, back up the set up data following the procedures below, and complete the installations.

10.2.1 Backing Up the Reader Set Up Data Upload and save to the CS-2 the settings and correction data saved in the connected REGIUS 170.

1.

Using a mouse or touch panel, open the “REGIUS Service Screen”. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedures to open the “REGIUS Service Screen”.

2.

Click [Service Tool]. “Service Tool” screen will be shown.

3.

Click [Reader]. “Reader” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.

4.

Click [PCB]. “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

5. 10-6

Select the reader whose set up data shall be backed up.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

When REGIUS 170 is selected

1.

Click [REGIUS 170 -> CS-2] in the [PCB] screen. The set up data will be uploaded to the CS-2 from the REGIUS 170.

2.

Touch [Exit]. The PCB screen screen closes, and switches to the “Reader” screen. Repeat Step 3 onward in Section 10.2.1, "Backing Up the Reader Set Up Data", and back up the set up data on all REGIUS 170s on the CS-2.

10.2.2 Back Up of CS-2 Set Up Data IMPORTANT Using the floppy disk on which a specific CS-2 has been backed up, you can restore the same set ups on the other CS-2. However, note that an error will occur if the restored CS-2 is interfaced to the same network as the original because the set ups unique to the original CS-2 are also restored on the other CS-2. If such happens, disconnect the restored CS-2 from the network, and set up the CS-2 uniquely from others. Note that when the license file is restored on another CS-2, the first CS-2 will no longer start up.

1.

Click [Backup] of the “Service Tool” screen. “Backup” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10-7

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

2.

Click [System]. “Save System Setup File” screen will be shown.

3.

Click [>>].

4.

Click [Save]. A message prompting an insertion of the desk into drive “A” will be shown.

5.

Insert a super disk into the super disk drive. “Browse for Folder” dialogue will be shown.

10-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

6.

Check that “3.5 Inch FD (A:)] is selected, click [OK]. Confirmation screen will be shown.

7.

Click [Yes]. Saving of the CS-2set up data will start. Progress will be indicated on “Saving ....” message while saving continues. Upon completion of saving, a message to inform completion will be shown.

8.

Click [Yes]. Returns to “System Set Up Save” screen.

9.

Click [Exit]. Confirmation dialogue will be shown.

10.

Click [Yes]. Returns to the “Service Tool” screen. Implementing the above procedures will complete the back up for one CS-2. When several CS-2s are set up, use a different floppy disk to implement the back up of set up data for each CS-2.

10.2.3 Deleting the Image Data In the last, delete the image data for check and adjustment of the reader by operating the CS-2. IMPORTANT Those image data that is in queue to printer or host shall not be the target data to be deleted. Deletion should be carried out after confirming that all image data has been output.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10-9

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

1.

Click [Adjustment] of the “Service Tool”. “Adjustment” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.

2.

Click [Delete Image] of “Image”. Browsing images stored in the CS-2, and “Delete Image Files” screen will be shown. IMPORTANT Images in the queue to printer or host can not be listed in this window.

3.

Click the first file in the top, and keep pressing [Shift] key, click the last file in the bottom. All files will be selected.

4.

Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen will be shown.

5.

Click [Yes]. A message indicating “Deleting ...” will be shown while deleting. Upon completion, a message to inform deletion is completed will be shown.

10-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

6.

Click [Yes]. Returns to “Service Tool” screen.

7.

Check that there is no image file left in the list, and click [Exit]. Confirmation screen will be shown.

8.

Click [Yes]. Returns to “Service Tool” screen.

9.

Click [Exit]. Returns to “REGIUS Service Screen”.

10.

Click [Shutdown] , and turn off the power of the CS-2. In a same manner, delete the image data on all CS-2s that implemented the reading of images.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10-11

10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

10-12

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11

Adjustment of Cassette Readers This section describes how to adjust the REGIUS 170.

This page intentionally left blank.

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size Check the pixels in the main scanning direction of the REGIUS 170, and adjust PLL setting if the result is out of allowance.

11.1.1 Checking Image Size, Read Start Position Reading the cassette on the REGIUS 170, which is exposed to produce solid density, and count the pixels in the main scanning direction. IMPORTANT For details of how to use the Examination Registration screen and Image Confirmation screen, refer to the CS-2 instruction manual. IMPORTANT With the CS-2, the Exam. tag for high-definition read resolution (87.5µm) is not set by default. Before performing this procedure, use Service Tool - Control Exam. Tag to change the resolution to high-definition. After finishing this confirmation procedure, change to the normal setting.

1.

On the CS-2 Operation Unit, input a dummy patient information for the image check purpose, then change to the Image Confirmation screen.

2.

Touch the square (Other) in the lower left corner of the body diagram and touch [TEST].

3.

Expose the test cassette to produce solid density.

• Bulb Voltage - 80kV, 10mAs / Distance - 2m • Align the long side of the cassette with the vertical direction of the X-ray bulb.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-1

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

4.

When the system is set to “Bar Code Registration”, read the bar code of the cassette that is exposed. When Pre-registration is set, the bar code of the cassette is displayed in the order. In the case of “Bar Code Registration”, bar code of the cassette will be shown on the order bar. For “Manual Registration”, it indicates as “1st”. With Auto-registration, nothing is displayed.

5.

Insert the cassette into the cassette reader. As the image in the cassette is read, the image is displayed on the screen of operation unit.

6.

Touch [OK].

7.

Touch [Complete].

8.

Touch [KONICAMINOLTA] and start Service Tool from the system menu or open the REGIUS Service screen and start the Service Tool. The Service Tool (Console) screen will be shown.

9.

Touch [Analyze]. “Analyze” screen will be shown.

11-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

10.

Click [Image]. Image-check tool will start.

11.

Select [Open (O)] in the [File (F)] menu. “Open” dialog will be shown.

12.

Open the image data read in step 8.

13.

Using mouse, count the number of fluorescent pixels(image pixels) in the horizontal direction of the read image.

14.

Check that the pixels counted in step 16 fall within the allowance (4046pixels -5 ~ +10 pixels).

15.

Select [View Size (V)] in the [Display (V)] menu, and select [No Pixel Skip (N)] in the submenu.

16.

Using mouse, check that the margin of H_sync(on the left side of image) on the plate falls within the allowance (30 ~ 45 pixels).

17.

Exit “Image Check” tool. Returns to the Service Tool (Analyze) screen. Fluorescent Pixel Size or pixels in the margin is out of the allowance, adjust the PLL, read start position following the procedures below.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-3

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

11.1.2 Adjusting PLL, Read Start Position

1.

Click [Reader] of the Service Tool screen. The Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

2.

Click [Device] of [System]. “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

11-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

3.

Select the reader on which the image is read, and click [OK]. “Ccu Device command Read/Write” screen will be shown.

To Change Pixels

1.

Change the setting of “Regular (x1.5 speed) Measured Pixels

Setting of PLL Pixel Clock Count

Larger than 4106 pixels

decrease

Smaller than 4091 pixels

increase

• The relationship between the pixels of high resolution(87.5µm) and PLL value would roughly be described as 1 pixel = PLL value x 1.3 To Change the Read Start Point

1.

In “Code” and “Pixels (high res)”, input the direction and quantity you want to shift the position.

• code + : shift the position toward H_sync. code - : shift the position recede from H_sync.

• Pixels (high res) : input the value calculated by “pixels for required shift x 2”

2.

Click [Send]. Altered value will be sent to the cassette reader.

3.

Click [Exit]. Returns to Service Tool (Reader) screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-5

11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette

11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette Whenever the optical unit of the cassette reader is replaced or starting to use the REGIUS Plate with new version, implement the unevenness correction following the procedures below. NOTE

1.

Use the largest cassette that is used in the facility for the correction of the unevenness. The correction value will be invalid for the sizes larger than the one used for the correction.

Using the condition shown below, expose a solid density image on the cassette for the unevenness correction. • Exposure Condition Volt : 80kV (fixed) mAs value : Set the X-ray dose so that the maximum data value falls within 1500 ~ 3000 Step. (target) Plate - Bulb distance : 2m or more (recommended)

• Align the long side of the cassette with the vertical direction of the X-ray bulb.

11-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette

2.

Click [Reader] of the “Service Tool”. The Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

3.

Click [Uneven. Cal.]. “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

4.

Select the cassette reader on which the unevenness should be corrected, and click [OK].

• “Unevenness Calibration” screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-7

11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette

5.

Select the resolution to be corrected in “Resolution”. Select “High (Auto)” (87.5µm) or “Standard” (175µm).

6.

When the system is set to “Bar Code Registration”, read the bar code on the cassette using a bar code reader. The bar code data read by the bar code reader will be displayed on the “Bar Code Registration”.

• When the system is set to manual registration, it is not necessary to read the bar code.

7.

Click [OK]. A dialog indicating the progress of the unevenness calibration will be shown.

8.

Insert the cassette into the REGIUS 170. As the image is read from the cassette, unevenness correction is implemented. Upon completion of the uneven correction, corrected result will be shown in the “Result” column.

9.

Click [Exit]. Returns to the Service Tool (Reader) screen. The corrected result of the unevenness will be saved in the unevenness correction table of the CS-2.

• For the unevenness calibration in normal case, Configure the correction for both "General High" (87.5µm) and “General Standard” (175µm).

11-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette Sensitivity calibration shall be necessary to compensate the sensitivity differences from one REGIUS 170 to the other when the condition of Xray generator device is altered. NOTE

1.

Use the largest cassette that is used in the facility for the correction of the unevenness. The correction value will be invalid for the sizes larger than the one used for the correction.

Using the condition shown below, expose a solid density image on the cassette for the unevenness correction. • Exposure Condition Voltage: 80kV (fixed) Standard X-ray Dose : 10m +/-2

• Align the long side of the cassette with the vertical direction of the X-ray bulb.

2.

Click [Reader] of the “Service Tool”. Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-9

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette

3.

Click [Sensitivity]. “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

4.

Select the cassette reader on which the unevenness should be corrected, and click [OK].

• “Sensitivity Calib” screen will be shown.

5.

Tick the “Automatic Calculation”, and select “High-A” from resolution.

• Ticking and selecting the “Automatic Calculation” will automatically create calibration data of “General Standard” using the calibration data of “General High” (this means calibrations will be completed by single exposure).

6.

Input the X-ray dose that is used for the exposure in “Exposure Dose”.

7.

When the system is set to “Bar Code Registration”, read the bar code on the cassette using a bar code reader. The bar code data read by the bar code reader will be displayed on the “Bar Code Registration”.

• When the system is set to manual registration, it is not necessary to read the bar code

11-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette

8.

Click [OK]. A dialog indicating the progress of the sensitivity calibration will be shown.

9.

Insert the cassette into the REGIUS 170. As the image is read from the cassette, sensitivity correction is implemented. Upon completion of the uneven correction, corrected result will be shown in the “Result” column.

10.

Click [Exit]. Returns to the Service Tool (Reader) screen. The corrected result of the unevenness will be saved in the sensitivity correction table of the CS-2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

11-11

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette

11-12

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12

Maintenance & Adjustment This chapter describes procedures for maintenance and adjustment of the CS-2.

This page intentionally left blank.

12.1 Regular Service Items

12.1 Regular Service Items Items and intervals for regular service of the CS-2 are listed below. Service Item Back Up of System Software

Interval Every 6 months

Replacement of Inner FAN Replacement of Hard Disk

Every 40,000 operation hours Every 5 years or 20,000 operation hours whichever comes first Annually Annually

Deletion of HIPAA log Defrag hard disk

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Procedure Section 10.2, "Backing Up the Set Up Data"

12-1

12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information

12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information Regularly backing up the CS-2 system data in the floppy disk will help restore the original system in case that the system data or CS-2 itself is collapsed or damaged in accident or by mistake. Also it will help investigate the cause of an error when it happens.

12.2.1 Back Up of System Information

1.

Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [Backup] of the Service Tool (Console) screen. The Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.

12-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information

3.

Click [System] of “System”. “System Setup File Save” screen will be shown.

4.

Click [>>]. All items in the left column (System Setup File) will be listed in the right column (Selected File for Save).

5.

Insert a floppy disk for save into the floppy disk drive slot.

6.

Click [Save]. “Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.

7.

After confirming that “3½ Floppy (A:)” is selected, click [OK]. A confirmation dialog will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-3

12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information

8.

Click [Yes]. “Saving......” dialog will be shown. A confirmation dialog will be shown when saving completes.

9. 10.

Click [Yes] of the dialog. Click [Exit] to close “System Setup File Save” screen.

12.2.2 Restore of System Information The system data backed up in the floppy disk can be restored by the following procedure.

1.

Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [Restore] of the Service Tool (Console) screen. Service Tool (Restore) screen will be shown.

3.

Install the floppy disk in which the system data has been backed up into the floppy disk drive.

12-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information

4.

Click [System] of “System”. “Systtem Setup File Restore ” screen will be shown. A list of files stored in the floppy disk is displayed in the “System Setup File” column.

5.

Select files to be restored from the “System Setup File” column, and click [>} or [>>]. Selected files in the left column (System Setup File) will be listed in the right column (Selected File for Save).

6.

Click [Restore]. A confirmation dialog will be shown.

7.

Click [Yes]. “Restoring......” dialog will be shown.

8.

After restoration completed, click [Exit] --> [ Yes]. Screen switches to Service Tool (Restore) screen.

9. 10.

Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive. Exit Service Tool screen, and restart the system software from the REGIUS Service screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-5

12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information

12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information JM data base can not be saved or restored in the same procedure as that used for saving or restoring the system information. Follow the procedure below to Configure back up and restore.

12.3.1 Back Up of System Information Following procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 that uses the external JM or internal JM.

1.

Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [Adjustment] of the Service Tool (Console) screen. Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.

3.

Install a floppy disk for back up into the floppy disk drive.

4.

Click [Backup] of “Job Manager”.

Command prompt will be shown on the window, and back up will start. The backed up data will be saved in the floppy disk under the name “jm_backup.bat”. After completing the back up, command prompt will close.

5.

12-6

Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information

12.3.2 Restore of JM Information Following procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 that uses the standard or backup JM.

1.

Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [Adjustment] of the Service Tool (Console) screen. Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.

3.

Install the floppy disk in which the JM information has been backed up into the floppy disk drive.

4.

Click [Restore] of “Job Manager”.

Command prompt will be shown on the window, and restore will start. After completing restore, command prompt will close. This completes restoration of the JM information. The device is restored.

5.

Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

6.

Exit the Service Tool screen, and restart the system software from the REGIUS Service screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-7

12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2

12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2 Upgrade should be carried out according to the procedures below when the CS-2 Program newer than the one currently installed on your CS-2 is available.

1.

Start the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedures to open the REGIUS Service screen.

2.

Click [File Import] of [Program]. “Install File” screen will be shown.

3.

Insert the CD that contains a new version into the CD drive of the CS-2. The CS-2 installer starts up automatically and the Install wizard appears. Click Cancel to quit the installer.

4.

Click [ • • • ]. “Open” dialog will be shown.

5.

Select the new program version of CS-2, and click [Open (O)]. Switches to the “Install File” screen, and the file name selected here for the “File Name” will be listed.

• The file name of CS-2 install software is ; •

6.

“PcProgx.xxRxTx” (x varies depending on the version) The CS-2 install file is stored under CD Drive: \route of the CD.

Click [OK] of the “Install File” screen. A dialog indicating the installation process will be shown. Upon completion of the installation, the dialog closes, and switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

12-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2

7.

Click [Upgrade] of [Console]. “Controller Program” screen will be shown.

8.

Select the latest version, and click [OK]. A dialog indicating the updating process of the program will be shown.

CAUTION

Never touch the “Cancel” on this dialog.

Upon completion of updating, switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

9.

Click [Exit] , and then click [Yes] of the confirmation dialog. Switches to the REGIUS Service screen.

10.

Click the [Windows Desktop]. Right-click the [Start] at the lower left of the screen, and click the [Explore (X)] in the displayed menu.

11.

Click “CD drive” -> “Vx.xxRxx” (“x” represents the CS-2 program version currently installed) in order in the hierarchical folder tree displayed on the left of the Explore, then double-click [Versionup] located on the right of the Explore. Command prompt will be displayed and update of the CS-2 Program begins.

12.

Press [Enter] key of the keyboard after a message “Versionup completed” is displayed. IMPORTANT Several command prompts may appear depending on the CS-2 Program. If other command prompts still remain on the screen after the message “Versionup completed” is displayed, wait until all other command prompts disappear before pressing the [Enter] key.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-9

12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2

13.

Click [X] at the upper right corner of the “Explore” to close the screen. IMPORTANT If “RmtGroup(.Dbg)” icon is located on the Windows desktop, drag it to the trash box and empty the trash box.

14.

Remove the cS-2 Program CD from the drive.

15.

Click the [Start] at the lower left of the screen, then the [Restart (R)] in the displayed menu. CS-2 will restart. Check that the version displayed in the start up screen of the program has been changed to the one of the updated program.

12-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170 Update the firmware (data stored in CF and control program of the mechanical control board) of the cassette reader. To update the software version of the REGIUS 170, use the “Service Tool” of the CS-2 that is connected to the REGIUS 170. IMPORTANT

CAUTION

1.

Failure to update the software version of the REGIUS 170 may result in a situation where the cassette reader will not be started up any more. Therefore, strictly follow the procedure below. Once the procedure for upgrade has started on the CS-2, never implement other operation. Also to be noted is that during the upgrade procedure, never turn off the power of the cassette reader. In case that the REGIUS 170 is unable to be started up, replace the MCB, SCB of the cassette reader, or replace the CF card followed by updating the MCB with the serial cable connected. When updating the software version of the REGIUS 170 in “n to m connection”, never operate the cassette reader(s) other than the targeted one as well as the CS-2 for the updating operation.

To restart, cycle the power (OFF/ON) of to all readers, CS-2s and external JM (if present). Shut down the backup JM CS-2 (not required for a 1-to-1 configuration) Shut down the standard JM CS-2 Turn ON the standard JM CS-2 Turn ON the backup JM CS-2 (not required for a 1-to-1 configuration)

→ → → →

Turn ON all REGIUS 170s.

2.

Start the “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. The Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-11

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170

3.

Click [Reader]. The Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

4.

Click [File Import] of [Program]. “Install File” screen will be shown.

5.

Insert the floppy disk that contains a new software version for the cassette reader into the floppy disk drive of the CS-2.

6.

Click [ • • • ]. “Open” dialog will be shown.

7.

Select the new program version of Cassette Reader Install File, and click [Open (O)].

Switches to the “Install File” screen, and the file name selected here for the “File Name” will be listed.

• The file name of Cassette Reader Install software is ; “CcuProgxx.xxRxx.Txx.lzh” (x varies depending on the version)

12-12

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170

8.

Click [OK] of the [Install File]. A dialog indicating the installation process will be shown. Upon completion of the installation, the dialog closes, and switches to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.

9.

Click [Upgrade] of [Program]. “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

10.

Select the reader device that you want to upgrade, and click [OK]. “Reader Program” screen will be shown.

11.

Select the latest version, and click [OK]. A dialog indicating the updating process of the program will be shown.

• Program change will be implemented in order of update of CF card --> MCB firmware rewrite. It takes 3 to 4 minutes to complete the program change. IMPORTANT Never touch the “Cancel” on this dialog. Neither attempt to implement any operation on the CS-2. IMPORTANT Never turn off the power of the cassette reader(s). Upon completion of updating, the dialog indicating the progress closes, and a dialog to indicate the completion of updating will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-13

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170

12.

Click [Yes]. Switches to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.

13.

Restart the cassette reader which has been updated. When “READY” appears on the LCD of the cassette reader after completing the restart, upgrading is successful. The program version currently running on the cassette reader can be verified on the “Version” of the “Reader Program” screen. (refer to step 9 through 10 to open the “Reader Program” screen)

14.

Start the “PostgreSQL access” of the JM, and check on the “r_version” screen that the version and updated data of the REGIUS 170 have been updated.

• Refer to Section 15.32.1, "“Network Diagnosis” Screen" for the procedure to operate “r_version” screen of PostgreSQL access. When several REGIUS 170s are connected to the system, upgrade each REGIUS 170 in a same manner.

12-14

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit

12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit This section describes the adjustment that makes images displayed on the CS-2 Operation Unit becoming close to the one on the Host or printer. Make this adjustment when it becomes necessary to adjust the brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit.

• At the time when CS-2(s) is installed. • When the luminance changes apparently due to the degradation of the CS-2 Operation Unit.

• When the standard viewer is replaced or changed. • When the CS-2 Operation Unit is replaced. • When the target printer is changed.

12.6.1 Adjusting the Brightness Refer to Section 9, "Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-15

12.7 Calibrating the Touch Panel

12.7 Calibrating the Touch Panel Calibrate the touch panel of the CS-2 Operation Unit. Perform this adjustment when the touched position does not match the mouse cursor position.

12.7.1 Calibration Refer to Section 8.1, "Calibrating the Touch Panel".

12-16

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM When there is a back up JM installed in the system, switch over from standard JM to back up JM can be managed by user in a simple manner. However, switch over from back up JM to standard JM after the standard JM has resumed normal function can not be managed by user. It needs “Service Tool” to implement the switch over.

12.8.1 Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM This procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 for standard JM.

1.

Replace or repair the faulty JM.

2.

Start up the standard JM, and start “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS Service screen.

3.

Restore the system information and JM data base. Refer to Sections 12.2.2, "Restore of System Information" and 12.3.2, "Restore of JM Information".

4.

Click [Adjustment] of Service Tool screen.

5.

Click [Configure] of “Job Manager”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-17

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

PostgreSQL access tool will start.

6.

Double-click [c_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool. “c_status” screen will be shown.

7.

Check that “c_stat” value for each CS-2 is set to “2”.

• If it is not set to “2”, click the figure, and input “2”.

8.

After verifying the number, click [Close].

9.

Double-click [r_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool. “r_status” screen will be shown.

10.

Check that “r_stat” value for each REGIUS 170 is set to “2”.

• If it is not set to “2”, click the figure, and input “2”.

12-18

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

11.

After verifying the number, click [Close].

12.

Click “Database” menu on “PostgreSQL access” screen, and select [Exit].

“PostgreSQL access” tool will close, and switches to the Service Tool screen.

13.

Click [Back] of Service Tool screen, then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. Screen switches to the REGIUS Screen.

14. 15.

Click [Return to Windows Desktop]. Open the "C:\KonicaMinolta\JM\control"folder and double-click the [job_clear] icon.

Command prompt appears for a moment, and all jobs within the JM will be cleared.

16.

Click [Shutdown (U)] to shut down the CS-2 for the standard JM..

12.8.2 Switch Over to Standard JM This operation shall be implemented on one CS-2 backup JM connected to the network. The information of JM switch over will be automatically delivered to other REGIUS 170 connected to the network.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-19

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

1.

Connect a standard JM to the network, and start up all CS-2(s) and REGIUS 170(s) connected to the network.

2.

Operating a backup JM on one of CS-2(s), and start “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display the REGIUS Service screen. Service Tool (Console) screen will be shown.

3.

Click [Job Manager] of “Input/Output”. “JOBM INFO • Job Manager” screen will be shown.

12-20

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

4.

Select “Back to Standard” in the left menu column. “JOBM INFO (JobMInf.ini.)” screen will be shown.

5.

Click “Permit to Change JM” box to enable the change.

6.

Click [Save & Exit] , then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. Screen switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

7.

Click [Back] and then [Yes] in the confirmation dialog. Screen switches to the REGIUS Service screen.

8.

Click [CS-2] to start the CS-2 application.

9.

Click [KONICAMINOLTA] of initial screen (“Examination List” or “Examination Search” screen. System Menu will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-21

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

10.

Click [Device Status]. “Device Status” screen will be shown.

11.

Click [JM] below REGIUS170. “JM Status Check” screen will be shown.

12-22

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

12.

Click [Standard LOCALHOST] , then [OK]. A confirmation dialog will be shown.

13.

Click [Yes]. A message to confirm start up of CS-2, REGIUS 170.

14.

Check that all CS-2s and REGIUS 170s that are connected to the system have started up, then click [YES]. IMPORTANT At this stage, if there is any CS-2 or REGIUS 170 that is not yet started can not receive the JM switch over information. Always check that all of those connected to the system have been started up.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

12-23

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

Switch over of the JM took place, and confirmation dialog will be shown.

15.

Click [YES] , and restart all REGIUS 170s that are connected to the system. Carrying out the above procedure completes the switch over of the JM has completed.

• Configure a test reading on all CS-2s and REGIUS 170s, and verify that the standard JM is operating normal.

• After verifying the standard JM’s operation, initialize the back up JM according to the same procedure as described in Section 12.8.1, "Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM".

12-24

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13

Disassembly & Assembly This chapter describes disassembly and assembly of the CS-2.

This page intentionally left blank.

13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and Connector

13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and Connector Refer to Sections 1.1, "Specifications" and 1.3, "Equipment Used" to check the position of the control and connector located at the front and rear of the Control Unit.

13.2 Removing the Cover 1.

Remove all media (diskette, CD and tape) from the drive, close the operating system and turn OFF all connected devices and the computer.

2.

Unplug all power cords from the output.

3.

Disconnect all of the cables connected to the computer. IMPORTANT Cables include power cord, I/O cable and all other cables connected to the computer.

4. 5. 6.

Remove the pedestal if attached. Unlock the cover if the cover lock is attached. As shown in the figure, push the two buttons to lift the top cover upward.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13-1

13.3 Component

13.3 Component 13.3.1

Component Position Check the position of components in the computer.

1. Diskette drive lock 2. DIMM (memory) connector (x2) 3. Battery 4. PCI riser 5. Power mechanism assembly 6. CD or DVD drive (hard disk drive is located under the DC drive) 7. CD or DVD device lock

13.3.2

Access to System Board Components and Drive To access some components on the system board such as the memory, battery and CMOS delete/BIOS recovery jumper, you need to lift the drive upward. You can use the same procedure to access the drive to replace with other drive or update to larger capacity drive.

13-2

1.

Turn OFF the computer.

2.

Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover".)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13.3 Component

3.

Turn the drive upward as shown in the figure.

IMPORTANT Make sure that the position of the cable disconnected from the drive or system board is understood.

4.

If the PCI adaptor is attached, remove the PCI riser and adaptor card. IMPORTANT Do not remove the adaptor from the riser card.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13-3

13.4 Identifying System Board Parts

13.4 Identifying System Board Parts The system board (also known as planar or mother board) is the center circuit board of the computer. This board provides basic computer functions and supports various devices. Parts on the system board

1. Fan connector (x2) 2. DIMM connector (x2) 3. Serial ATA1IDE and serial ATA2IDE hard disk drive connector (x2) 4. PCI riser connector 5. Battery 6. CMOS delete/BIOS recovery jumper 7. Speaker connector 8. POV card connector (some models) 9. Diskette drive connector 10. Front panel connector 11. Power connector 12. Parallel ATA primary IDE connector (HD and CD-ROM drive) 13. Power connector 14. Microprocessor 15. CD audio connector

13-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13.5 Attaching Memory

13.5 Attaching Memory The computer comes with two connectors used to attach the dual inline memory module (DIMM) and can attach up to 2 GB system memory. Use the following rules to attach the memory.

• Use 2.5V, 184 pin, Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Ran•

dom Access Memory (DDRSDRAM) and non-ECCDIMM. Use any combination of 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB or 1 GB (if possible).

IMPORTANT DDRSDRAMDIMM only can be used.

13.5.1

Attaching DIMM

1.

Access the system board. (Refer to Section 13.3.2, "Access to System Board Components and Drive".)

2.

Check the DIMM connector position. (Refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts".)

3.

Open the clip.

4.

Push the memory in the connector until the clip closes.

IMPORTANT Always align the cut-out of DIMM against the tab of the connector.

5. 6. 7.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

When the PCI riser is removed, return the PCI riser and adaptor. Return the drive to the original position. Put the cover back.

13-5

13.6 Replacing the Battery

13.6 Replacing the Battery The computer features special type memory that retains settings (configuration) of the built-in (standard features) mechanism including date, time, and parallel port assignment. Even though you turn OFF the computer, these information is retained in active status by the battery. The battery does not require charging nor maintenance during its service life. Note that, however, it does not last forest. When a problem occurs with the battery, date, time and configuration information (including password) are lost. In that case, upon power on the computer, an error message appears.

1.

Refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts" to check the location of the battery.

2.

Remove the PCI riser and PCI adaptor that are obstacles when handling the battery.

3.

Remove the old battery.

4.

Attach the new battery.

5.

If you have removed the PCI riser, attach the PCI riser and adaptor.Return the cover and connect the cable. IMPORTANT An error message may appear when turning the computer ON for the first time after replacing the battery.This is a normal status that occur after the battery is replaced.

6.

Replace the covers in their original positions and connect the cables. IMPORTANT An error may appear when the PC is turned ON the first time after the battery replacement. You can ignore this error because it usually happens after battery replacement but does not cause any problems.

7. 8. 13-6

Turn ON the computer and all connected devices. Use the IBMSetupUtility program to set the date, time and password.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive

13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive The built-in drive is used by the computer to read and save data. You cannot attach an additional drive in the computer but you may want to replace it with a larger capacity drive or other type of drive to be able to read other type of media. Type of drive that can be used with the computer include:

• • • • •

Parallel ATAIDE hard disk drive Serial ATAIDE hard disk drive Tape drive DD-ROM, CD-RW, or DVD-ROM optical disk drive Diskette drive and other removable media drive

To attach the built-in drive again, you need to make sure the type of drive to be reattached. The following figures shows a parallel ATAIDE hard disk drive and serial ATAIDE hard disk drive. Parallel ATA IDE drive

Serial ATA IDE drive

The following table shows various drive types and the connector used to connect these drives to the system board. You need to connect the power cable from the power supply system to each drive. Serial ATAIDE HD drive

Connects to serial ATA1IDE or Serial ATA2IDE connector

Parallel ATAIDE HD drive

Connects to parallel ATA primary IDE connector

CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD optical disk drive

Connects to parallel ATA primary IDE connector

Floppy disk drive

Connects to disk drive connector

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13-7

13.8 Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD Optical Disk Drive

13.8 Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD Optical Disk Drive 1. 2.

Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover") Turn the drive bay upward so that you can handle the cable. (Refer to Sections 13.3.1, "Component Position" and 13.3.2, "Access to System Board Components and Drive".)

3.

Detach the signal and power cables from the drive. IMPORTANT A blue strap is provided to be used when detaching the cable.

4.

Unlock the drive. (See 1 in the figure below.)

5.

Open the door in front of the drive, slide it to remove it from the front of the computer.

6.

Slide the part of the new drive into the bey from the rear. IMPORTANT Set the jumper of the new drive form "Master" to "CableSelect" and then attach the new drive.

7.

Connect the flat cable to the new drive.

8.

Slid the new drive to completely insert it into the bey and set the drive lock to the lock position.

9.

Depending on the type of drive to be attached, proceed to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover". Next steps

• To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page. • To complete reattachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the cover and connect the cable.

13-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13.9 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive

13.9 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive 1. 2.

Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover") Turn the drive bay upward so that you can handle the cable (Refer to Sections 13.3.1, "Component Position" and 13.3.2, "Access to System Board Components and Drive".)

3.

When the CD drive is attached, detaching the signal cable from the CD drive makes it easy to handle the hard disk drive cable. IMPORTANT A blue strap is provided to be used when detaching the cable.

4. 5.

Detach the signal and power cable from the hard disk drive. Pull the attached blue handle to turn the had disk drive and bracket to the rear side.

6.

Lift the hard disk drive and bracket to remove. Bend the bracket to remove the drive from the bracket.

7. 8.

Attach the new drive to the bracket and insert the bracket in the slot. Turn the drive and bracket to the front of the computer until they click into place.

9. 10.

Slide the lock to the lock position. Depending on the type of drive to be attached, proceed to Section 13.11, "Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive". IMPORTANT

If you separate the signal cable of the CD drive, do not forget to reconnect the cable.

Next steps

• To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page. • To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the cover and connect the cable. CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13-9

13.10 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive

13.10 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive 1. 2.

Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover") Unlock the diskette drive and slide the drive toward the rear of the computer until you have enough room to handle the flat cable connector on the drive.

3. 4.

Disconnect the flat cable from the drive. Turn the drive bay upward to detach the diskette drive.

Attaching the new diskette drive

1. 2. 3.

Slide the part of new drive to the bay from behind to insert. Connect the flat cable to the new drive. Slide the new drive completely to the bay and bring the drive lock to the lock position.s Next step

• •

13-10

To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page. To complete reattachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the cover and connect the cable.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13.11 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive

13.11 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive 1.

Find the signal cable attached to the computer or new drive. IMPORTANT To attach the parallel ATA to the Serial ATA Hard disk drive, it is necessary to obtain the signal cable. This cable is not attached to the computer.

2.

Check the serial ATA connector position on the system board. (Refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts".)

3.

Connect one end of the signal cable to the drive and the other end to the serial ATA1IDE or serial ATA2IDE connector on the system board. IMPORTANT Connecting to either serial ATA connector makes no difference.

4. 5.

Connect the power connector to the drive. Return the drive bay to the normal position. Next step

• To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page. • To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the cover and connect the cable.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

13-11

13.12 Connecting IDE Drive

13.12 Connecting IDE Drive 1.

Find the signal cable with 3 connectors that is attached to the computer. One end of the cable is connected to the IDE connector of the system board. Two drives can be connected to the other two connectors.

2.

Check that one end of the signal cable is connected to parallel ATA primary IDE connector on the system board. (Refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts".)

3.

Connect unused signal cable connector to the drive that is going to be attached. IMPORTANT To connect the hard disk drive, always connect it the connector at the end of the cable. Use the other connector for the optical disk drive.

4. 5.

Connect the power connector to the drive. If you have the CD drive audio cable (this does not come with the computer), connect it to the drive and system board. For position of the CD audio connector, refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts".

6.

Return the drive bay to the normal position. Next step

• •

13-12

To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page. To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the cover and connect the cable.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14

Troubleshooting This chapter describes CS-2 troubleshooting.

This page intentionally left blank.

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application Error Nos and messages which may be displayed on the window during operation of CS-2 are listed below. Should the error repeat even after the remedy, back up the system information, logs, JM logs in the floppy disk.

• Refer to Sections 12.2.1, 12.2.2 and 14.2.

14.1.1 Errors relating to hardware and software Errors shown below are those that will be displayed on the window when there occurs abnormalities with the CS-2 hardware or application software. Error No.

Message

Remedy

No Number

Hard disk error. Call your field service engineer.

Occurs when remaining memory space becomes small. Occurs when output data or RIS resultsend data piles up in the queue as well as error with hard disk. Check if the output or sendresult is OFF.

1000

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

Restart the CS-2

1001

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1002

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1003

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1004

Resource error [%s,%X,%X] , restart.

1005

Resource error [%s,%X,%X] , restart.

1006

Resource error [%X,%X] , restart.

1007

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1008

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1010

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1011

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1012

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1015

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1016

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1020

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1021

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1022

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1023

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1024

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1025

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1026

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1027

Resource error [%X] , restart.

1030

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1031

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1032

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1033

Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.

1040

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-1

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

Error No.

Message

Remedy

1041

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1042

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1043

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1044

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1050

Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.

1051

Resource error [%s] , restart.

1052

Resource error [%s] , restart.

1053

Resource error [%s] , restart.

14.1.2 Errors relating to communication (Viewer/Server/Printer/ External patient/Examination DB) Troubles which may be encountered in use of the CS-2 and remedies are listed below. When the remedy does not help to solve the problem, replace the CS-2 Control Unit. Error No.

Message

Remedy

1060

Faulty communication setting [%s,%X]. Call service engineer.

1061

Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.

1062

Communication error [%X,%X]. Check communicating device.

1063

Communication error [%s,%d]. Check communicating device.

1. Check the communicating device on other side. 2. Check networking devices and cables. 3. Restart the CS-2.

1064

Communication error [%s,%d,%X]. Check communicating device.

1065

Communication error [%d,%X]. Check communicating device.

1066

Communication error [%d,%X]. Check communicating device.

1067

Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.

1068

Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.

1069

Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.

1070

Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.

1071

Communication error [%d,%X]. Check communicating device.

1072

Communication error [%d,%X]. Check communicating device.

1132

Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.

1133

Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.

1134

Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.

1135

Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.

1120

Connection rejected. Check status of communicating counterpart.

1121

Connection rejected. Check status of communicating counterpart.

1122

Faulty communication setting. Call service engineer.

1123

Faulty communication setting. Call service engineer.

1110

Connection rejected [X%]. Check status of communicating counterpart.

1111

Connection rejected [X%,%X,%X]. Check status of communicating counterpart.

Check the communication setting of the counterpart.

1112

Receipt data faulty [%X]. Check communication counterpart.

1113

Receipt data faulty [%X,%X,%d]. Check communication counterpart.

1124

Communication interrupted [%X]. Check communication setting and communication counterpart.

1131

Receipt data faulty [%X,%X]. Check status of communication counterpart.

14-2

1. Check the communicating device on other side. 2. Check networking devices and cables. 3. Restart the CS-2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

Error No.

Message

Remedy

1100

Reservation failed [%X,%X] [%d]. Check reservation data.

1101

Reservation failed. Check reservation data.

1102

Reservation failed [%04X,%04X] [%d]. Check reservation data.

Check the reservation information on which the error occurred.

1103

Reservation failed [%04X,%04X] [%d]. Check reservation data.

1104

Reservation failed [%04X,%04X] [%d]. Check reservation data.

1105

Reservation failed. Check reservation data.

1130

Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%d]

1150

Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X]. Put output queue OFF.

1151

Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X]. Put output queue OFF.

1160

Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X,%X]. Put output queue OFF.

1140

Fail to save image data[%X,%X]. Check communication counterpart.

14.1.3 Error relating to output queue control Errors which will be displayed when abnormality occurs on queue control of CS-2 application. Error No.

Message

Remedy

1400

Inconsistent output queue control [%d,%X]. Call service engineer.

1401

Inconsistent output queue control [%s,%X]. Call service engineer.

1402

Output queue registration error.

14.1.4 External patient/Examination DB-related error Errors displayed when errors occur in the External patient/Examination DB Error No.

Message

Remedy

1450

Inconsistent X-ray implementation information[%d,%X]. Call service engineer.

1452

RIS output queue registration error

1500

Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s,%s,%d]. Call service engineer.

Check order information from RIS.

1501

Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s,%s,%d]. Call service engineer.

1502

Incorrect system parameter setting. Call service engineer.

1503

Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X]. Call service engineer.

1504

Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X,%d]. Call service engineer.

1505

Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s]. Call service engineer.

1506

Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s]. Call service engineer.

1507

Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X,%X,%d]. Call service engineer.

1508

Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s]. Call service engineer.

1509

Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%s]. Call service engineer.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-3

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

14.1.5

Errors relating to reading Errors which may appear while the CS-2 application executes reading.

Error No.

Message

Remedy

1218

Input patient ID.

Operated by user.

1219

Input examination ID.

1220

Input patient name.

1251

Already reached limit of simultaneous reading.

1250

Setting of reading condition failed. Call service engineer.

1210

Register examination reservation.

1212

Image not suitable to reading.

1214

Failed to open image file.

1215

Reservation file deleted.

Operated by user.

14.1.6 Errors relating to REGIUS 170 Errors which may be displayed when there occurs an error on the REGIUS 170. Error No.

Message

Remedy

1252

Failed to acquire relative “jid” information from jobs. [%s]

Restart the REGIUS 170 on which an abnormality occurred.

1253

Reading executed on other thread. jid=[%s] OrdrNum=[%d]

1254

Faulty read setting. Call service engineer.

1280

Reader error kick. Jid=[%s] Err=[%s].

1281

Image reading of ID[%s] , Name [%s] [%s] , Exam. Time [%02d:%02d:%02d] failed. [%s]

1282

Error occurred. jid=[%s] [%s].

1283

Error occurred [%s].

• When an error occurs on REGIUS 170, refer to “REGIUS Service” manual for how to remedy the trouble.

14-4

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

14.1.7 Errors relating to printer Errors which will be displayed when an abnormality occurs on printers. Error No.

Message

Remedy

1170

CHECK PRINTER[%s]

Check the printer on which an error occurred.

2001

BAD RECEIVE MGZ

2002

BAD SUPPLY MGZ

2003

CALIBRATING

2004

CALIBRATION ERR

2005

CHECK CHEMISTRY

2006

CHECK SORTER

2007

CHEMICALS EMPTY

2008

CHEMICALS LOW

2009

COVER OPEN

2010

ELEC CONFIG ERR

2011

ELEC DOWN

2012

ELEC SW ERROR

2013

EMPTY 8X10

2014

EMPTY 8X10 CLR

2015

EMPTY 8X10 BLUE

2016

EMPTY 8X10 DR

2017

EMPTY 8X10 DR CLR

2018

EMPTY 8X10 DR BLUE

2019

EMPTY 8X10 PAPR

2020

EMPTY 11X14

2021

EMPTY 11X14 CLR

2022

EMPTY 11X14 BLUE

2023

EMPTY 11X14 DR

2024

EMPTY 11X14 DR CLR

2025

EMPTY 11X14 DR BLUE

2026

EMPTY 11X14 PAPR

2027

EMPTY 14X14

2028

EMPTY 14X14 CLR

2029

EMPTY 14X14 BLUE

2030

EMPTY 14X14 DR

2031

EMPTY 14X14 DR CLR

2032

EMPTY 14X14 DR BLUE

2033

EMPTY 14X14 PAPR

2034

EMPTY 14X17

2035

EMPTY 14X17 CLR

2036

EMPTY 14X17 BLUE

2037

EMPTY 14X17 DR

2038

EMPTY 14X17 DR CLR

2039

EMPTY 14X17 DR BLUE

2040

EMPTY 14X17 PAPR

2041

EMPTY 24X24

2042

EMPTY 24X24 CLR

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-5

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

Error No.

Message

Remedy

2043

EMPTY 24X24 BLUE

2044

EMPTY 24X24 DR

Check the printer on which an error occurred.

2045

EMPTY 24X24 DR CLR

2046

EMPTY 24X24 DR BLUE

2047

EMPTY 24X24 PAPR

2048

EMPTY 24X30

2049

EMPTY 24X30 CLR

2050

EMPTY 24X30 BLUE

2051

EMPTY 24X30 DR

2052

EMPTY 24X30 DR CLR

2053

EMPTY 24X30 DR BLUE

2054

EMPTY 24X30 PAPR

2055

EMPTY A4 PAPR

2056

EMPTY A4 TRANS

2057

EXPOSURE FAILURE

2058

FILM JAM

2059

FILM TRANSP ERR

2060

FINISHER EMPTY

2061

FINISHER ERROR

2062

FINISHER LOW

2063

LOW 8X10

2064

LOW 8X10 CLR

2065

LOW 8X10 BLUE

2066

LOW 8X10 DR

2067

LOW 8X10 DR CLR

2068

LOW 8X10 DR BLUE

2069

LOW 8X10 PAPR

2070

LOW 11X14

2071

LOW 11X14 CLR

2072

LOW 11X14 BLUE

2073

LOW 11X14 DR

2074

LOW 11X14 DR CLR

2075

LOW 11X14 DR BLUE

2076

LOW 11X14 PAPR

2077

LOW 14X14

2078

LOW 14X14 CLR

2079

LOW 14X14 BLUE

2080

LOW 14X14 DR

2081

LOW 14X14 DR CLR

2082

LOW 14X14 DR BLUE

2083

LOW 14X14 PAPR

2084

LOW 14X17

2085

LOW 14X17 CLR

2086

LOW 14X17 BLUE

2087

LOW 14X17 DR

14-6

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

Error No.

Message

Remedy

2088

LOW 14X17 DR CLR

2089

LOW 14X17 DR BLUE

Check the printer on which an error occurred.

2090

LOW 14X17 PAPR

2091

LOW 24X24

2092

LOW 24X24 CLR

2093

LOW 24X24 BLUE

2094

LOW 24X24 DR

2095

LOW 24X24 DR CLR

2096

LOW 24X24 DR BLUE

2097

LOW 24X24 PAPR

2098

LOW 24X30

2099

LOW 24X30 CLR

2100

LOW 24X30 BLUE

2101

LOW 24X30 DR

2102

LOW 24X30 DR CLR

2103

LOW 24X30 DR BLUE

2104

LOW 24X30 PAPR

2105

LOW A4 PAPR

2106

LOW A4 TRANS

2107

NO RECEIVE MGZ

2108

NO RIBBON

2109

NO SUPPLY MGZ

2110

CHECK PRINTER

2111

CHECK PROC

2112

PRINTER DOWN

2113

PRINTER INIT

2114

PROC INIT

2115

PROC OVERFLOW FL

2116

PROC OVERFLOW HI

2117

RECEIVER FULL

2118

REQ MED NOT INST

2119

REQ MED NOT AVAI

2120

RIBBON ERROR

2121

SUPPLY EMPTY

2122

SUPPLY LOW

2123

UNKNOWN

• When an error occurs on printers, refer to printer’s manual for how to remedy the trouble.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-7

14.2 Collecting the Logs

14.2 Collecting the Logs When a technical claim is reported from the user, collect logs using the procedure described in this paragraph. For the claim relating to CS-2 system: Configure all procedures for log collection and back up described in this praragraph. For the claim relating to connected devices: Configure all procedures for log collection and back up described in this praragraph. For the claim relating to image quality: Configure the procedure described in Section 14.3, "Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)" in addition to all procedures for log collection and back up described in this paragraph.

14.2.1 Collecting the Application Logs Application logs are detailed operational history of CS-2 application software. When an error occurs on the CS-2 application, collect error date, application logs about the occurrence date so that it help investigate the cause of errors.

• Implementing “Log” of the Service Tool Screen will save the collected logs in the floppy disk.

• Application log and images may be too big to be saved in a floppy disk. In such a case, save it on the hard disk once and then use the write function of Windows to move the data to a CD from the hard disk or directly save it to a USB storage device. If you save data on the hard disk, always move it to the recycle bin and empty the recycle bin.Also, if you use an USB memory, always disconnect the device.

1.

Start “Service Tool ” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

14-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.2 Collecting the Logs

2.

Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Backup) screen . Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.

3.

Click [Log] of “Log”. “Log File Save” screen will be shown.

4.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Insert a floppy disk for saving logs into the floppy disk drive.

14-9

14.2 Collecting the Logs

5.

Select the date of the log which shall be backed up, then click [Save]. “Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.

6.

Confirm that “Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK]. Confirmation dialogue will be shown.

7.

Click [YES]. “Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while saving.

• Since the log files in the CS-2’s hard disk will first be compressed into a single file, then saved, it will take several minutes to complete. Upon completion of save, confirmation dialogue will be shown.

8. 9.

Click [YES] of the dialogue. Click [Exit] to close “Log File save” screen.

14.2.2 Collecting the System Logs System log can be used to reproduce institutions system configuration and very useful for claim analysis.

• Executing [System] on "Service Tool (Backup)" will allow the system information to be saved in the floppy disk.

1.

Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

14-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.2 Collecting the Logs

2.

Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Console) screen. Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.

3.

Click [System] of "System". The “System Setup File Save” screen will be shown

4.

Click [>>]. All of the left side list items are displayed in the right side list.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-11

14.2 Collecting the Logs

5. 6.

Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Click the [Save] button. “Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.

7.

Check that "3.5 inch (FD (A:)" is selected and click [OK]. A confirmation dialog appears.

8.

Click [Yes］ . “Saving......” dialogue will be shown.

9.

Confirming that the saving has completed without failure, click [Exit] > [Yes]. The Service Tool (Backup) screen reappears.

14.2.3 Collecting the Reader Logs Reader logs are the information regarding the operational history and hardware of the REGIUS 170 reader, history of errors and warnings, and history of calibrations. Although the reader logs are stored in the reader itself, they can be uploaded onto the CS-2 using “Service Tool”.

■ In the case of REGIUS 350

• The reader log uploaded from REGIUS 170 can be stored in the CS-2’s hard disk and floppy disk.

1.

Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

14-12

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.2 Collecting the Logs

2.

Click [Reader] of Service Tool (Reader) screen. Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

3.

Click [Reader Log]. When there are several readers are connected to the CS-2, “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

4.

Select the reader device whose reader log should be collected, and click [OK]. “Reader Log” screen will be shown.

5. CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Insert a floppy disk for saving logs into the floppy disk drive.

14-13

14.2 Collecting the Logs

6.

Click [Reader Log]. “Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.

7.

Confirm that “3.5 Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK]. Starts receiving the reader log from the selected reader, and saved in the super disk. “Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while receiving the log and saving.

8. 9. ■ In the case of REGIUS 190/170

Click [YES] after saving has completed. Click [Exit] to close “Reader Log Info.” screen.

• The reader log uploaded from REGIUS 190/170 can be stored in the CS-2’s hard disk.

1.

Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to “1.7.1 Service Tool Screens” for the procedure to open the “REGIUS Service” Screen.

14-14

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.2 Collecting the Logs

2.

Click [Reader] of “Service Tool” screen (Reader). “Service Tool” screen (Reader) will be shown.

3.

Click [Subsys]. When there are several readers are connected to the CS-2, “Reader Device” screen will be shown.

4.

Select the reader device whose reader log should be collected, and click [OK]. “Sub SystemLog Create” screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-15

14.2 Collecting the Logs

5.

Click [SubSystemLog Create]. Sub log will be created in the selected reader. Upon completion of log creation, a dialogue indicating the end of log creation will be shown.

6.

Click [Yes]. Returns to the “Sub Log Create” screen.

7.

Click [Exit]. Returns to “Service Tool (Reader)” screen.

8.

Click [Reader Log]. “Reader Log” screen will be shown.

14-16

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.2 Collecting the Logs

9.

Select the device name selected in the step.4. again, and click [Get Reader Log]. “Folder Browse” screen will be shown.

10.

Select an appropriate folder on the desktop (Administrator’ s document folder, etc.) and click [OK]. A dialogue confirming whether to save or not will be shown. Collecting the reader log from the selected reader, and saved in the selected folder. “Saving ...” dialogue will be displayed while saving and receiving the log data.

11.

Click [Yes] when save has completed.

12.

Click [Exit] to close “Reader Log” screen. Returns to the “Service Tool (Reader)” screen.

13. 14. 15.

Click [Back] to switch to the “REGIUS Service” screen. Click [Back to Windows Desktop] to display the Windows desktop. Copy the files selected in the step. 10. onto CD-R.

14.2.4 Back Up of JM Logs Back up of JM logs should be carried out in a way different from those for other logs. IMPORTANT When backing up of logs, collect application logs, system logs, and reader logs before starting back up.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-17

14.2 Collecting the Logs

1.

Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

2.

Click [Adjustment] of Service Tool (Console) screen. The Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.

3. 4.

Insert a floppy disk for saving logs into the floppy disk drive. Click [Log] of “Job Manager”. Command prompt will be shown on the screen, and log collection and back up will be initiated. Upon completion of back up, command prompt will be closed.

14-18

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)

14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported) When a technical claim regarding the image quality such as abnormality in image processing, unable to output individual image, abnormality in image reading (unable to display all images, images with noise) is reported, save the claimed image data in a super disk in addition to system information, system logs, and JM logs following the procedure described in the preceeding pages.

• Application log and images may be too big to be saved in a floppy disk. In such a case, save it on the hard disk once and then use the write function of Windows to move the data to a CD from the hard disk or directly save it in an USB memory. If you save data on the hard disk, always move it to the recycle bin and empty the recycle bin.Also, if you use an USB memory, always disconnect the device.

1.

Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of CS-2. Refer to for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.

2.

Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Console) screen. Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

14-19

14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)

3.

Click [Image] of “Image”. “Image File Save” screen will be shown.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Select the image which was claimed to be abnormal. Click to select [All] of “Save Option”. Insert a floppy disk for saving logs into the floppy disk drive. Click [Save]. “Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.

8.

Confirm that “3.5 Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK]. Confirmation dialogue will be shown.

9.

Click [YES]. “Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while saving. Upon completion of save, confirmation dialogue will be shown.

14-20

10.

Click [YES] of the dialogue.

11.

Click [Exit] to close “Image File save” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15

Service Tool Screens

This page intentionally left blank.

15.1 Service Tool Overview

15.1 Service Tool Overview 15.1.1 •

Alternative of Starting the Service Tool

Starting Up the Service Tool from the System Menu

When the Service Tool is initiated from the CS-2 application software, the CS-2 application program keeps running on the background. Therefore, clicking [Exit] will instantly switches the screen to the application. However, the set items that may affect the operation of CS-2 application will be concealed in order to prevent troubles. Start Up Procedure • • • • [Konica REGIUS] --> [Utility] --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678) IMPORTANT Following three screens will be displayed only when the examinations are browsed from the “Exam History” screen after starting up the Service Tool from the System Menu followed by returning from the Service Tool to the System Menu. Item [Learn]

Screen Image confirmation screen

ROI

Image confirmation screen Image confirmation screen

Processing name and serial number of the image processing parameter

Function Density and contrast adjustment value at this time can be immediately reflected in the image processing parameter. Used when immediately setting the image processing parameters in the Image browse screen favorable to the user. Displays ROI in a square frame in the X-rayed image. Displays the processing name and serial number of the image processing parameter used for the image processing. (For the exam. tag key for which the subject auto-recognition is set to ON, the processing name and serial number of the image processing parameter of the recognized result.)

Screen example when [Learn], ROI and processing name and serial number of the image processing parameter are displayed. Image confirmation screen

•

Image browse screen

Starting Up the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service Screen

When the Service Tool is initiated from the REGIUS Service Screen, set ut items will be displayed without any limitation. To return to the CS2 application, it is necessary to restart the CS-2 application from the REGIUS Service Screen. Start Up Procedure • • • • [KONICAMINOLTA] --> [Utility] --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678) --> [Exit] --> [Shutdown] --> [Yes] --> Select [Service Tool] in the REGIUS Service Screen --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 1

15.1 Service Tool Overview

15.1.2

Summary of the Service Tool Screens

The service tool screen is a screen where all keys for starting the setting tools are classified depending on the purposes. Service Tool Screens initiated from the REGIUS Service Screen is described below. IMPORTANT [Gateway] is displayed in the Service Tool sceen when “Gateway to Others” for RIS or HOST is set to ON. Service Tool Screens

[Console]

[Console] > [Layout]

Start Up Keys ( : only available when activated from the REGIUS Service Screen) [Layout] [System Info] [Job Manager] [Printer] [Host] [RIS] [Density] [Stamp] [Exam Tag] [Process] [Gateway] [Patient DB] [License] [File Import] [Upgrade]

[General] [Exposure Registration] [Search Result] [Exposure List] [Image Confirmation] [History] [Statistics]

Description 15-5 15-14 15-32 15-34 15-45 15-55 15-67 15-69 15-75 15-83 15-89 15-92 15-97 15-96 15-96

15-5 15-7

15-12

[Reader] [Reader] [Device] [Std Current] [Sensitivity] [Reader Logs] [File Import] [Upgrade] [Network]

15 - 2

15-98 15-99 15-102 15-105 15-108 15-109 15-109 15-110

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.1 Service Tool Overview

Service Tool Screens

Start Up Keys

[Back Up]

( : only available when activated from the REGIUS Service Screen) [System] [Image] [Hipaa Log] [Log]

[Restore]

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

[System] [Image]

Description 15-111 15-112 15-113 15-114

15-115 15-116

15 - 3

15.1 Service Tool Overview

Service Tool Screens

[Adjustment]

[Analyze]

15 - 4

Start Up Keys ( : only available when activated from the REGIUS Service Screen) [Brightness] [Delete Image] [Delete All] [Configure] [Backup] [Restore] [Log] [Initialize] [Statistic]

[Ping] [Image] [App Log] [Sys Log]

Description 15-117 15-122 15-123 15-124 15-124 15-124 15-124 15-124

15-129 15-130 15-138 15-138

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...]

15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...] 15.2.1

“General Setup” Common Screen

Key/Item [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

15.2.2

Function Click to exit from “DISPLAY INFO” screen after saving the settings. Click to exit from “DISPLAY INFO” screen without saving the settings.

“General Setup” Screen ・ General IMPORTANT In the case when the screen setting is changed, the changes will not be reflected on the CS-2 application when the restart is initiated from [CS2] of the REGIUS Service Screen. To reflect the changes, either click [Restart] in the REGIUS Service Screen or restart the PC from the Windows XP desktop.

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [Localize...]

Key/Item Localize Language Date Time Screen Default Screen

Function Select a language to use with the CS-2 application. “Japanese”, “English” or “Other”. Select “MM/DD/YYYY”or “ DD/MM/YYYY”. Select “12hour” or “24hour”. Select the initial screen. Select “List”, “Input/Search” or “Amendment”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 5

15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...]

Key/Item Screen keyboard

PN Component List Screen Patient ID Length Radiation Dose Align Mammo Image Reject Image Save

Image Reject log

Annotation Function Always Indicate Character Size

15 - 6

Function Select whether to change the keybaord displayed in the Examination Registration screen to the language where the system is used. "ON" .....Change to local language. "OFF".....Do not change to local language. Select "Delimiter | | or “Delimiter |A|". Select “Search” or “Not Search”. Select “1~32”. Select “Input” or “Not Input”. No use. Select whether to abort the rejected image or to keep it in the Console. ON : Keep OFF: Abort Select wheter to allow the user to select the image reject reason or not. ON : Displays a dialogue on which the user may select the image reject reason when implementing the reject action. "NG Reason Edit" screen becomes available on the “User Tool” screen, allowing the user to edit the reject reason. Select whether to enable or disable the annotation function. Select whether to display the character strings set on the “Annotation” screen also on the other screen. Select the unit to express the character size that is displayed on the “Annotation” screen. Select from “mm” or “inch”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

15.3 15.3.1

[Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics] “QA Tool Column Edit” Screen

A screen to edit the items displayed on the Image analysis tool screen. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • •[Console] --> [Layout] -->Select [Statistics]

Key/Item [Reject], [Exam.], [Console], [Plate], [Reader] Selected = xx / All = xx

Up/Down Append [Append]

Function Select the analyzing item to be edited from these buttons. Selected / All Selected : Number of items selected. All : Number of items available for selection. ListDisplays a list of display items which are currently set. Select the item to be deleted or changed. To add an item, select whether it is added before or after the selected item. Moves the cursor (highlighted item) in the item list up and down. Moves the cursor (highlighted item) in the item list up and down. Add a new item in the item list. ･

Displays Item(Append/Edit) screen.

[Edit]

Allows to edit the item selected in the item list.

[Delete] [Save&Exit] [Cancel]

･ Displays Item(Append/Edit) screen. Deletes the item selected in the item list. Click to exit from “QA Tool Column Edit” screen after saving the settings. Click to exit from “QA Tool Column Edit” screen without saving the settings.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 7

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

15.3.2

Configure Tool

This screen is used to set display specifications of the Examination Registration screen in accordance with user requests. IMPORTANT In the case when the screen setting is changed, the changes will not be reflected on the CS-2 application when the restart is initiated from [CS2] of the REGIUS Service Screen. To reflect the changes, either click [Restart] in the REGIUS Service Screen or restart the PC from the Windows XP desktop. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [Study Registration screen]

Key/Item Preset Button [Preset 1 ~ 10] Selection List

Function Select the display format that has been preset on the CS-2 in advance.

Available Items

Select the display position of the items. The figure on the left of the item name indicates the display page and position on the screen. Select the item which shall be displayed at the position selected in the “List”.

[Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Sets details of set up for the item selected in the “List”. The set items which have white back ground only are valid for change. Click to exit from “Configure Tool” screen after saving the settings. Click to exit from “Configure Tool” screen without saving the settings.

Detail

15 - 8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

•

Items available on the Examination Registration screen

List of Available items Patient ID Name ASCII Birth Date (Age) Patient Comments Alert Contrast Allergies Residence (Ward) Patient Location Study Comment Hospital Department Recording Physician Kana Study Name

Scheduled Study Start Date Study Date Recording Physician Kanji X-ray Room

Name Kana Occupation Nationality Patient Confidentiality Reason for Study Referring Physician ASCII ASCII

Name Kanji Height Pregnancy Accession Number

Sex Weight (kg) Special Needs Study ID

Birth Date/Time Nationality Patient State Medical Alerts

Requesting Physician ASCII Referring Physician Kana Radiologist Kana

Requesting Physician Kana Referring Physician Kanji Radiologist Kanji

Requesting Physician Kanji Recording Physician ASCII Diagnosis Description

Available Items - The List corresponds to the display position of the following Examination Registration screen.

IMPORTANT ＊ -2 item name is not displayed. IMPORTANT When ＊ -2 is undefined, ＊ -2 area is not secured.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 9

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

15.3.3

“Study List (Column Heading)” Screen

This screen is used to set items (columns) that are displayed on three screens, “Study List”, “History” and “Study Result”, according to user requests. Settings other than the selection items are common to each of two screens. IMPORTANT In the case when the screen setting is changed, the changes will not be reflected on the CS-2 application when the restart is initiated from [CS2] of the REGIUS Service Screen. To reflect the changes, either click [Restart] in the REGIUS Service Screen or restart the PC from the Windows XP desktop. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [List] or [History], [Search Result]

• Clicking on [Append] or [Edit.] will switches to the “Append/Edit” screen.

Key/Item Preset Button [Preset 1 ~ 10] Item List

Append [Append]

[Insert] [Append] [Edit] [Delete] [Save&Exit] [Cancel]

15 - 10

Function Select the display format that has been preset on the CS-2 in advance. Displays a list of display items which are currently set. Select the item to be deleted or changed. To add an item, select whether it is added before or after the selected item. Add a new item in the list. • Displays Append/Revise screen. • Refer to the “List Display Selection Items” for the items available for addition. Add the item before the selected item. Add the item after the selected item. Changes the display format of the item selected in the item list. • Displays Append/Revise screen. Deletes the item selected in the item list. Click to exit from “Study List (Column Title)” screen after saving the settings. Click to exit from “Study List (Column Title)” screen without saving the settings.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

•

“Append / Edit” Screen

Key/Item Available Items

Function Select the items to be added. For correction, the items selected in the item list of “Study List (Column Title)” will be displayed. Input the name to be displayed in the list.

Display Name Title Font Size Bold Double String Position

Input the font size (point) that will be used for the title displayed in the list. Check to change title letters to bold. Check to change title letters to shadowed letters. Select the position of the title in the cell. “Upper-left”, “Upper-center”, “Upper-right”, “Left-center”, “Middle”, “Right-center”, “Lower-left”, “Lower-center”, “Lower-right”.

List Font Size Bold Double String Position

Input the font size used for the data displayed in the list Check to change data letters to bold. Check to change data letters to shadowed letters. Select the position of the data in the cell of the list. “Upper-left”, “Upper-center”, “Upper-right”, “Left-center”, “Middle”, “Right-center”, “Lower-left”, “Lower-center”, “Lower-right”. For the character strings which is longer than the cell width, check this to break a line to start a new line.

Line wrap

Items for List Display Raw Display Type Selection Item List Patient ID Patient Name Ward Study Date

Sex Birth Date Accession Number Study ID

Age Registered Date

Exam. Room PDA (CS-1/3)

Guard NG Reason

Perform

Exam. Status

Patient Comments Hospital Department Alert

―

―

―

Exam. Tag Requested Procedure D

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 11

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

15.3.4

Image Confirmation screen Editing Tool screen

This screen is used to set the display specifications of the image confirmation screen in accordance with user requests. IMPORTANT When settings in this screen are changed, even though the CS-2 application is restarted using [CS2] in the REGIUS Service screen, the changes are not reflected. To reflect the changes, click [Restart Windows] from the EGIUS Service screen or reboot the PC from the Windows XP desktop. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure [Console] → [Layout] → [Image Confirmation]

Key/Item Patient Info display area Format

Detailed Item ID

Name Sex

Function NameAge Select one of the following four options for the format of patient information displayed in the patient information area. "Name (Sex) Age" "Name (Sex) Birth Date,Age" "ID Name (Sex) Age" "ID Name (Sex) Birth Date, Age" If a format including ID is selected for "Format", select one of the following three ID types: "Patient ID", "Study ID", "Accession Number" Specify the display format. ¢Roman£, ¢Kana£, ¢Kanji£ When Sex is not entered in the patient information, select the following two types of display in the patient information display area: "Display ' '", "Display ' - '"

Image Display / Image Confirmation area Display Gradation Linkage Select the image displayed in the Image Diaplay/Image Confirmation area from either printer output or host output. "Printer" / "HOST1" / "HOST2" Stamp Display Specify whether to display the stamp format/position. Focus Control Select at which timing the focus is moved. "Do not auto control", "Read Start Time", "Read End Time", "Auto Confirm Time"

15 - 12

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]

Key/Item Read Registration Post-registration/Autoregistration

Function

The first registered X-rayed part is automatically registered for read in the first place and when that image is read, the next registered X-ray part is automatically registered for read. This function eliminates the step to select the order button when reading X-rayed body parts in the order of registration. This setting is valid only when the cassette registration method is set to "Post-registration". Pre-registration auto-focus Set whether to move the focus to the next order when a barcode is registered. This setting is valid only when the cassette registration method is set to "Pre-registration". S value adjustment Select the change amount used when the density adjustment button is touched once. amount The density of the signal value around density 1.2 increases/decreases by the value set here (equivalent to Dmax3.0). Facility where viewer is used for diagnosis ・ ・ ・ ・ 0.05 Facility where film is used for diagnosis ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ 0.02 G value adjustment Select the change amount used when the contrast adjustment button is touched once. amount Contrast increases/decreases by the value set here. Facility where viewer is used for diagnosis ・ ・ ・ ・ 0.05 Facility where film is used for diagnosis ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ 0.02

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 13

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.] 15.4.1

“SYSTEM INFO” Screen

Key/Item [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

15.4.2

Function Click to exit from “System Info.” screen after saving the settings. Click to exit from “System info.” screen without saving the settings.

“SYSTEM INFO • Institution Info.” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Also to be able to start up from the User Tool

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Institution Info.] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Institution Info Institution Name Institution Address Department Name

15 - 14

Function Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60) Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60) Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60) Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.3

“SYSTEM INFO • REGIUS Info.” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Regius Info.] in the left menu.)

Key/Item System Manufacturer Model Name Production Name Serial No. Shipping Date Application Software Version Installation Date Installation Time

Function

Normally set at the factory. Use this name as a manufacturer when sending additional information to the HOST. Normally set at the factory. Set when installed. Do not change the preset number. Set when installed.

Displays the current version No. of the CS-2 application. Displays the installation date of the CS-2 application. Displays the installation time of the CS-2 application.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 15

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.4

“SYSTEM INFO • System (Reader)” Screen

Using this screen, register the reader device in the system or set the names used in the system. Related Setting ;Section 15.17, "[Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”" Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Reader)] in the left menu.)

Key/Item REGIUS 170 Model Name Reader 1 ~ 2 Disp. Name

15 - 16

Function Input the name for specifying the several REGIUS 170s collectively, using 1 byte x 10 characters 2 byte x 5 characters. Check “Registered” for the reader device to be used in the system. Input the name used in the system with 1 byte x 10 characters 2 byte x 5 characters.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.5

“SYSTEM INFO • System (Host, Printer)” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Host, Printer)] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Host Host 1~3 Disp. Name

Function Check “Registered” for 1 through 4 corresponding to the number of hosts connected. • Host 3 is for back up. Input the host name with 1 byte x 10 characters, 2 byte x 5 characters, for the device specified as “Registered”.

Printer Printer 1~2 Disp. Name

Check “Registered” for 1 through 2 corresponding to the number of printers connected. • Printer 2 is for back up. Input the printer name with 1 byte x 10 characters, 2 byte x 5 characters, for the device specified as “Registered”. • Max. 10 x 1 byte characters.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 17

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.6

“SYSTEM INFO • System (RIS)” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (RIS)] in the left menu.)

Key/Item RIS (Patient/Study) RIS1, RIS2 Disp. Name RIS (Result) RIS1, RIS2 Disp. Name

15 - 18

Function Set the presence of RIS device from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2. Input the RIS name that is assigned to “Registered”. • Input the name using 1 byte x 10 characters. Set the presence of RIS device to which the examination result is sent from the CS-2. Input the RIS name that is assigned to “Registered”. • Input the name using 1 byte x 10 characters.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.7

“SYSTEM INFO • (Option)” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

IMPORTANT Check boxes shown on this screen are available only when the optional license is purchased. Display Procedure • • • •[Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Option)] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Option HQ Mammography Stitching Image Sharing Data Analysis

Function Not used. Select whether to use the stitching function or not. Select whether to use the image sharing function or not. Select whether to use the data analysis function or not.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 19

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.8

“SYSTEM INFO • Order Info.” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Order Info.] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Order Input Mandatory Additional Mandatory Item (Multi Select)

Order Auto Creation

Exam Tag (Default)

Default Reader*1 Exam Tag Set*1 Name [Modify]*2 Patient ID Patient ID Format*3 Patient ID Start*3 Patient ID Length*4

Function Select the patient information that is essential in order information. • [None], [Patient ID], [Patient Name]. (default: none) Select multiple items that should be included in the reservation information. • “Patient ID”, “Name”, “Reserved”, “Reserved”, “Sex”, “Birth Date”. • Items set in the “Input Mandatory” + “Additional Mandatory Item (Multi Select)” are the essential patient information that should be included in the reservation information. Check “ON” if you want to use the serial number automatically issued by the CS-2 as the patient ID. (default: OFF) • When selecting “ON”, set the format and initial count in the [Patient ID] box in the following. Set the default exam. key or not. (default: nonspecific) Nonspecific • • • not to specify Specific • • • Specify the number for the default exam. tag. • When “Specific” is selected, click “Modify” and select the default Exam Tag key. Displays the name of reader icon on which the default exam. tag is set. Displays the name of Exam Tag (Default) key. Select the name of Exam. Tag (Default) key. • “Exam. Key Set” screen will be shown. Specify the format of the patient ID to be automatically created. Change the current value of the automatically generated patient ID. Enter the number of digits in the patient ID specified by the facility. When the number of digits of the entered patient ID is smaller than the set number of digits, add 0 (zero) at the beginning of the patient ID. If the number of digits is larger, it is not necessary to do anything.

*1: Contents of the display becomes effective when “Specific number” is selected by “Exam Tag (Default)” key. *2: Becomes effective when “Specific number” is selected by “Exam Tag (Default)” key. *3: Enables input when “ Order Auto-Creation” is set to “ON”. *4: Enables input when “ Order Auto-Creation” is set to “OFF” (no check).

15 - 20

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.9

“SYSTEM INFO • Study Info.” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Study Info.] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Study INFO. Study ID Format

Function Edit the format of exam. ID. (default: *****)

IMPORTANT Always start with @ that indicates the machine number. Study ID Start Value Study ID Clearance

Serial Infomation

Series number formation rule Modify Warning

Un-adjustment warning

Change the current Study ID count. (default: 1) Sets the condition when the ID card is used. (default: OFF) ; [OFF] • • • Add ID card information to the patient information input on the keyboard. [ON] • • • Replace by the ID card information. Select the subject to which the series information to be added. (default: REGIUS 150 compliance) REGIUS 150 Compliance • • • adds the information to the image to send. DICOM Compliance • • • adds the information to the examination result to send. Select whether to add serial No.(number set to the Regius Info. -> System -> Serial No.) to the series No. ex) When the Serial No. “123”, Series No. “1” --> “12301” Select whether to send an alarm when patient info or additional info is changed during study (while reading the image). When it is not checked (OFF), it sends an alarm if change is made. When the screen changes from the Patient Registration screen to the Exposure Confirmation screen, set whether to issue an alert if the patient name in kana and the patient name in ASCII are compared and do not match. When “OFF” ([Do not alert]) is not selected, an alert is displayed.

• Study ID will be automatically changed and issued internally. It will be overwritten when the Study ID is sent from the RIS.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 21

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.10 “SYSTEM INFO • Timeout” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Timeout] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Timer List Auto Confirm

Time Auto Study Complete

Screen Saver

Time

15 - 22

Function Select the timing from the following to output the image upon the user’s confirmation. (default: OFF) [ON] • • • After reading the image, when an specific time elapses, it deems that the image has been verified (OK), and the image is automatically output. [OFF] • • • The image will not be output until the user touches “OK” button. Set the auto-confirmation time. (default: 20sec) Select the operation to be initiated upon the completion of an examination, from the following. This item cannot be set when the initial screen is the Image confirmation screen. [OFF] • • • Press “Complete” button to exit the examination. [ON] • • • Automatically completes the examination, and the screen returns to the initial screen. Cannot holdback the examination once the all exam data in the order are confirmed. Select the type of screen-saving from the following. (default: OFF) ON • • • The screen switches to the screen saver after the time that is input in the [Time] box has elapsed. OFF • • • Screen saver is disabled. Set the time before the screen saver starts (default: 1800sec)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.11 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <User>” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Password <User>] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Password Setting New Password

New Password (Conf.)

Function Currently available password is shown. (default: 1234) Input the new password to change. • Use 4 digits only. Input the password identical to the one newly input in the “New Password” box so that the verification is made. • This box become available only when clicking after the new password has been input in the “New Password” box.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 23

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.12 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <Service>” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Password<Service>] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Password Setting New Password

New Password (Conf.)

15 - 24

Function Currently available password is shown. (default: 5678) Input the new password to change. • Use 4 digits only. Input the password identical to the one newly input in the “New Password” box so that the verification is made. • This box become available only when clicking after the new password has been input in the “New Password” box.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.13 “SYSTEM INFO • Output Priority” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Output Priority] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Priority Type Output Device

Function Select the output device to which the priority is given, and the output order among them. Type 1 • • • “No priority output device, output in order” Type 2 • • • “No priority output device, concentrated output”

Priority for Host Host 1 Host 2 Priority for Printer Printer

Set the output priority on each host that is registered in the system.

Set the output priority on each printer that is registered in the system.

• See below for the print order of the type for “Priority Type” --> “Output Device”. Type 1 : Printer

Host

Image 1

1st

2nd

Image 2

3rd

4th

Image 3

5th

6th

Type 2: Printer

Host

Image 1

1st

4th

Image 2

2nd

5th

Image 3

3rd

6th

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 25

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.14 “SYSTEM INFO • Log Level “ Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Log Level] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Log Level

Function Set the log level to be stored in the HDD for each device. Do not change unless otherwise instructed. (default ; 4)

IMPORTANT Improper setting of log level may cause unnecessary occupation of the memory capacity of the HDD.

15 - 26

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.15 “SYSTEM INFO • My Network” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

• Set this screen when the backup JM is set for the system. Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Communication Setting Broadcast Address

Port Number

[Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [CS-2 Network] in the left menu.)

Function Set the address to which the JM switch over information is sent (broadcast) from one CS-2 to the other. • Set “255.255.255.255” (fixed) Set the port number for broadcast. (default: 31313131 fixed) • Do not change the default.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 27

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.16 “SYSTEM INFO • HIPAA” Screen Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item HIPAA HIPAA Mode

15 - 28

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [HIPAA] in the left menu.)

Function Checking “ON” will add to the CS-2 application a security function conforming to the HIPAA rule of the US .

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.17 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Filliping Mark” display Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

• This screen is used to set whether the filliping mark is embedded in the output image. When the ON checkbox of "Fillping Mark" is selected, the following respective mark is printed on the output. With no filliping mark

With filliping mark

IMPORTANT When the ON checkbox is selected, regardless of the type of output device, the image data is output with the filliping mark Console embedded. Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Filliping Mark] in the left menu.

Key/Item Filliping Mark Filliping Mark Filliping Mark Position

Filliping Mark Size

Function Select whether to embed the filliping mark in output images. To embed, select the “ON” checkbox. When the “ON” checkbox is selected, select the position in which the filliping mark is embedded. • "Upper-left, "Upper-right", "Lower-left", "Lower-right" When the “ON” checkbox is selected, select the size of the embedded filliping mark. • "7 x 7mm", "10 x 10mm"

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 29

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.18 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Remote Maintenance” display Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

• This screen is used to set whether to obtain the remote maintenance preservation data and image adjustment logs from outside devices. Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Remote Maintenance] in the left menu Function

Key/Item Remote Maintenance IA Auto-start Ccu Maint Info Get Setup Ccu1 Disp Name Maint Info

Ccu2 Disp Name Maint Info

15 - 30

Function Select whether the remote maintenance should be enabled or not. Ticking “ON” enables the remote maintenance accessing from external point.

Disp Name of Reader1 is displayed. Unable to set. Tick the box when the remote-maintenance of the Reader1 info shall be implemented.Select REGIUS 170 or REGIUS 190 that shall be set to the Reader1 from the drop down menu on the right. Disp Name of Reader2 is displayed. Unable to set. Tick the box when the remote-maintenance of the Reader1 info shall be implemented.Select REGIUS 170 or REGIUS 190 that shall be set to the Reader2 from the drop down menu on the right.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.19 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Image Sharing” display Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

• This screen is used to set whether to obtain the Image Sharing preservation data and image adjustment logs from outside devices. Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Image Sharing] in the left menu Function.

Key/Item Local Disp. Name

Remote Position IP Address HOST Name Display Name

Function Input the name of your console (currently operated). The name input here will be displayed in the “Image Sharing” screen. Set the name unique to each console so that the image sharing implemented on the other console should work properly. Input the IP address of the Console that shares the image. Input the Host Name of the Console that shares the image. Input the Name of the Console that shares the image. The name input here will be displayed in the “Image Sharing” screen. Set the name unique to each console so that the image sharing implemented on the other console should work properly.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 31

15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager]

15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager] 15.5.1

“JOBM INFO • Job Manager Info.” Screen

Set the properties of JM (Job Manager) which the CS-2 recognizes. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Job Manager]---> (Select [Job Manager Info.] in the left menu)

Key/Item Basic Setting Registrer Host Name

Communication Setting (Standard) built-in IP Address

Communication Setting (Buckup) Registered Device Built-in IP Address

Function Select one the following three types of cassette registration: "Auto-registration", "Post-registration", "Pre-registration" Input the serial No. labeled on the back of the CS-2. (cs2- ****: **** means serial No.) (Initial value: CS1-0001)

Input the IP address of the JM when the “Job Manager (Build-in) is OFF. • Default: 192.168.20.180, varies depending on the institute. • Fixed to “127.0.0.1” when it is ON. Set the information when a back up JM is used. Check when a back up JM is used. Select the “ON” checkbox when the IM contained in the CS-2 is used for backup. When “Job Manager (Built-in)” is set to “OFF” (no check mark), input the IP address of back up JM.

IMPORTANT The "Communication Setting /Job Manager Built-in" and "Communication Setting (Backup) /Job Manager Built-in" settings are linked. They cannot be selected at the same time. "Communication Setting /Job Manager Built-in" can be deselected only when “Pre-registration” is set.

15 - 32

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager]

15.5.2

“JOBM INFO • Back to Standard” Screen

• This screen is displayed only when the back up JM is in operation due to failure of standard JM. Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Job Manager] --> (Select “Back to Standard” in the left column)

Key/Item Change to Standard Permit to Change JM

Function Clicking the check box enables the button on “JM-1 Status Check” screen to select the standard JM

IMPORTANT The setting on this screen is available only once while the back up JM is operating. Once the JM is changed to the standard, this screen will not be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 33

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6 [Console] > [Printer] 15.6.1

Common Display of “PRINTER INFO” Screen

Key/Item Printer Selection (upper left menu) Printer Type

Function Select the printer name to be set. At the start of setup, always select the printer type that corresponds to the selected printer name. Because the printer type is newly selected, the preset values currently displayed have no meaning any more.

IMPORTANT When this function is to be used, select the printer type first, before starting the setting. Selecting the printer during the setting procedure will overwrite the revised setting on the preset condition. [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

15.6.2

Click this button to exit from “PRINTER INFO” screen after saving the setting. Click this button to exit from “PRINTER INFO” screen without updating the setting.

“PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Service Class Presentation LUT Acquire Status

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Command] in the left menu.)

Function Select “ON” to send the LUT for matching density between the monitor properties and printer output. (default: OFF) Select the choice of status acquisition, and the type of status from the following. (default: OFF) “OFF”, “N-GET”, “N-EVENT-REPORT”, “N-GET+N-EVENT-REPORT”

Image

15 - 34

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

Key/Item Photometric

Image Processing

Function Select the measuring method of light intensity from the following. monochrome 1 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for black, “4095” for white. monochrome 2 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for white, “4095” for black. Set one of the following two image processing methods: "Output D-value", "Output P-value"

Printer Icon

15.6.3

Select the device. This setting will be used for ; • Decision of the icon displayed on the “System Status” screen. • Decision of the printer’s Dmax, Dmin.

“PRINTER INFO • Basic TCP/IP” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Interval 1 Interval 2

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Basic TCP/IP] in the left menu.)

Function Input the printer used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the printer’s IP address. Input the port No. Input the duration for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 60000) Input the interval (ms) of the output queues that will be sent to the printer. (default: 1000) Input the interval (ms) with which the confirmation signal for communication is sent to the printer. (default: 10000)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 35

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.4

"PRINTER INFO • Basic DICOM” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax

Printer AE-Title CS-2 AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set Private Data

15 - 36

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Basic DICOM] in the left menu.)

Function Select the transfer syntax from the following. Normally select the default “Implicit VR Little Endian”. “Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain VR. “Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Reversible JPEG”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG. • Normally use the default. Input the AE title of the printers using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”. • Normally use the default. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. (ASCII only) “ASCII” Select “Send” or “Not send” for the private data transmission. (default:Sent).

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.5

“PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen

This setting will be required when “N-EVENT • • •” is selected in “Status Acquisition” of Section 15.6.2, "“PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen". Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Setting Value Import [Import]

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP] in the left menu.)

Function Input the printer used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the printer’s IP address. Input the port No. Input the duration for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 60000) Copies the Basic TCP/IP setting, and overwrites the setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 37

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.6

“PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen

This setting will be required when “N-EVENT • • •” is selected in “Status Acquisition” of Section 15.6.2, "“PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen". Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax

Printer AE-Title CS-2 AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set Private Data Setting Value Import [Import]

15 - 38

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM Setting] in the left menu.)

Function Select the transfer syntax from the following. Normally select the default “Implicit VR Little Endian”. “Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain VR. “Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “JPEG Lossless”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG. • Normally use the default. Input the AE title of the printers using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”. Displays the implemented version name “KC_RS_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. (ASCII only) • “ASCII” Select “Send” or “Not send” for the private data transmission. (default:Sent). Copies the Basic TCP/IP setting, and overwrites the setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.7

“PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Printer Condition Trim Border LUT Contrast Density Stamp

Smoothing Type

Magnification Type Polarity Priority Film Type Regular

Mammo

Film Destination

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Printer Condition] in the left menu.)

Function Select “Available” to trim the image on the printer. (default: Unavailable) Select the boarder color from the following. • “Black”, “White” Select the printer’s internal LUT from “LUT1” ~ “LUT7”. Select from “+7” ~ “-7”. (default: ±0) Select from “+7” ~ “-7”. (default: ±0) Select ON/OFF. (default: all OFF) When selecting “ON” for general, then select “ON/OFF” for 4 items, i.e. “Date”, “Message”, “Copies”, “Modality ID”. Select from the following. (default: Smoothing Level 3) • When “Interpolation” is selected, interpolation will be implemented on the CS-2. • “Type 1” ~ “Type 5” is the smoothing levels implemented on the printer side. Input the name of magnification type using 1 byte x 16 characters. Select from the following. (default: NORMAL) • “REVERSE”, “NORMAL” Select from the following. (default: Middle) • “HIGH”, “MED”, “LOW” Select the normal film type that is loaded in the printer from the following. (default: DR Blue) • “Blue”, “Clear”, “DR Blue”, “DR Clear” Select the mammo film type that is loaded in the printer from the following. (default: DR Blue) • “Blue”, “Clear”, “DR Blue”, “DR Clear” Select the output destination from the following. • “Processor”, “Magazine”, “BIN1” ~ “BIN9”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 39

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.8

“PRINTER INFO • Output Size” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Available Size Size Conversion Supply Film

15 - 40

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Output Size] in the left menu.)

Function Check the film sizes which the printer can output. Select the film size that replace the size that is not available but requested by print queue. Set the film type loaded in the tray.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.9

“PRINTER INFO• Image” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Image] in the left menu.)

Key/Item Image Image Reduction Mode

Std. Illumination

Function Select the type of compression when sending the image data from the following. (default: spline) "Spline", "Decimate/Crop", Bilinear0, SINC". Luminance of hypothetical illumination that is used in “P” value conversion.

IMPORTANT Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here. Std. RFL. AMB. Light

Luminance of hypothetical ambient light that is used in “P” value conversion.

IMPORTANT Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here. Grid Suppress Process Annotation

Select whether to suppress the grid mesh or not. (default: OFF) “OFF”, ON” Tick to embed the annotation in the output image.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 41

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.10 “PRINTER INFO • Output Setting” Screen Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Queue Skip Error Queue

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Sampling Pitch] in the left menu.)

Function Select “ON” to skip the output when there occurs an error in the output queue. (default: OFF) “ON”: Skips the queue on which an error occurred, and outputs the next queue. “OFF”: Suspends the output of queues till the error is reset.

• Setting “Skip Error Queue” to “ON” will output the next queue even in the case of “Film Empty”. This may result in irregular print order. Therefore, set this item to “OFF” in normal use.

15 - 42

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.11 “PRINTER INFO • Printer“ Screen Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Boundary Primary Scan Pixels Overflow print memory Multiformat

Rotation

Mixed Format

Std Film Ori 8x10 - Std Film Ori 24x30cm Frame L/R Pixels

Frame Bottom Pixels

Frame Top Pixels

Trim Frame Pixels

Border Pixels

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Printer] in the left menu.)

Function Input the border pixels. (default: 2) Input the main scan pixels. (default: 10838) Item unique to DRYPRO 793, and automatically selected (ticked) when the DRYPRO 793 is selected in the Printer Type. Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: Printer) Printer …… Implemented on the printer side. Regius …… Implemented on the CS-2 side. Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: Printer) Printer …… Implemented on the printer side. Regius …… Implemented on the CS-2 side. Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: CS-2) Printer …… Implemented on the printer side. Regius …… Implemented on the CS-2 side. Select the standard film orientation (Ver/Hor) per film size.(default : landscape for 11x14, portrait for other sizes) Input the image frame pixels. (default: 0) Set the items per read resolution.Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the dropdown menu on the right. Input the text width pixels. (default: 0) Set the items per read resolution. Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-down menu on the right. Input the viewer width pixels. (default: 0) Set the items per read resolution. Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-down menu on the right. Input the trim frame pixels. (default: 0) Set the items per read resolution. Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-down menu on the right. Input the boarder pixels. (default: 32) Set the items per read resolution. Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-down menu on the right.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 43

15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.12 “PRINTER INFO • Output Pixel” Screen Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Output Pixel Reading Pixel Size Output Pixel Size

Width Height

15 - 44

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Output Pixel (175)µm] in the left menu.)

Function Select the resolution of images. "175" , "87.5", “43.75” Select the printer output pixel size. (Initial value: 78.6) "Same as input", "40µm", "78.6µm" "43.75µm", "79.375µm" or manually enter a numeric value Set the output pixels for each film size in numbers for width at normal mode. Set the output pixels for each film size in numbers for height at normal mode.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7 [Console] > [Host] 15.7.1

Common Settings of “HOST INFO” Screen

Key/Item Host Selection (upper left menu) Host Type

Function Select the host name to be set. At the start of setup, always select the host type that corresponds to the selected host name. Select [RS] if no host type corresponding to the host name is available. Because the host type is newly selected, the preset values currently displayed have no meaning any more.

IMPORTANT When this function is to be used, select the host type first, before starting the setting. Selecting the host type during the setting procedure will overwrite the revised setting on the host condition. [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

15.7.2

Click this button to exit from the “HOST INFO” screen by saving the setting. Click this button to exit from the “HOST INFO” screen without saving the setting.

“HOST INFO • Command” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item Gateway Gateway

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)

Function Select whether to use the gateway program (program other than DICOM) • OFF: Do not use the gateway program • ON: Use the gateway program

Service Class

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 45

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

Key/Item Image IOD

Storage Commitment

GSPS

Function Select the image data type to be sent to the host according to the destination host. (default: CR) • “CR”, “DX”, “DX + MG” Sets whether to implement the communication regarding the Storage Commitment service with the HOST. • OFF: Do not implement the Storage Commitment service. • ON: Implement the Storage Commitment service. Sets whether to implement the communication regarding the GSPS service with the HOST. • OFF: Do not implement the communication. • ON: Implement the communication.

Image Photometric

Image Processing

15.7.3

“HOST INFO • C-STORE TCP/IP” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Interval 1

15 - 46

Select the measuring method of light intensity from the following. monochrome 1 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for black, “4095” for white. monochrome 2 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for white, “4095” for black. • Raw Data (KonicaMinolta Host): Outputs Raw data + Image Processing Parameters. • Image Processed. D-value (Other Host): Outputs the processed image data in density value. This is to maintain compatibility with older version. • Image Processed. P-value (Other Host): Outputs the processed image data in value that is visually linear.

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [C-STORE TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)

Function Input the host name used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the host’s IP address. Input the port No of the host. Input the duration for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 60000) Input the interval (msec) for the output queue that is sent to the host. (default: 1000)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.4

“HOST INFO • C-STORE DICOM” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax

HOST AE-Title REGIUS AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set

Private Data Dataset Extension

VR Check

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [C-STORE DICOM] in the lower left menu.)

Function Select the transfer syntax from the following. (default “Implicit VR Little Endian”) “Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain VR. “Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Reversible JPEG”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG. Input the AE title of the Hosts using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. • “ASCII” • “Latin1” Selects “Send” or “Not send” for private data transmission. OFF: normal • When the “Service Class” of the RIS is set to “MWM”, setting this to [ON] will output the additional dataset to the host. Refer to “Additional Dataset” in the next page. Checks whether the data complies with DICOM. If it does not comply, prohibit it from being sent. (default: OFF)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 47

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

•

Additional Dataset 0040.1001: Requested procedure ID (Requested procedure ID) 0040.0009: Reserved procedure step ID (Reserved procedure step ID) 0040.0007: Reserved procedure step description (Reserved procedure step description ) 0040.0008: Reserved execution item code sequence (Reserved execution item code sequence) 0040.0253: Executed procedure step ID (Exam ID) 0040.0244: Executed procedure step start data (Exam start date) 0040.0245: Executed procedure step start time (Exam start time) 0040.0254: Executed procedure step descriptor (Reserved procedure step description) 0040.0260: Executed execution item code sequence (Reserved execution item code sequence)

15.7.5

“HOST INFO • N-ACTION TCP/IP” Scree

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement1” is selected in “SOP Class” of "Storage Commitment", p.15-46. Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Timeout 2 Interval1 Setting Value Import [Import]

15 - 48

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-ACTION TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)

Function Input the host used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the host’s IP address. Input the port No. Input the duration for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 60000) Not used (default: 0) Input the interval (ms) between the queues which are sent to the host. (default: 1000) Copies the “Storage TCP/IP” setting, and overwrites.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.6

“HOST INFO • N-ACTION DICOM” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement1” or “Storage Commitement” is selected in “SOP Class” of"Storage Commitment", p.15-46. Start up from the system menu

Display Procedure • • •

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax

Host AE-Title CS-2 AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set

Private Data Setting Value Import [Import]

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

[Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-ACTION DICOM] in the lower left menu.)

Function Select the transfer syntax from the following. (default “Implicit VR Little Endian”) “Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain VR. “Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Reversible JPEG”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG. Input the AE title of the host using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (default: 65536). • Use the default as it is. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. (ASCII only) • “ASCII” • “Latin1” Select Yes/No of private data transmission. (default: “Send”) Copies “Storage DICOM” setting, and overwrites.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 49

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.7

“HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement” is selected in "Storage Commitment", p.15-46. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Storage Commitement2-T] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Setting Value Import [Import]

15 - 50

Function Input the host used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the host’s IP address. Input the port no. Input the duration before the confirmation for safe receipt of image data from CS-2 is sent. (default: 60000) Copies “C-STORE TCP/IP” setting, and overwrites.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.8

“HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage+Storage Commitement” is selected in"Storage Commitment", p.15-46. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax

HOST AE-Title REGIUS AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set

Private Data Setting Value Import [Import]

Function Select the transfer syntax from the following. (default “Implicit VR Little Endian”) “Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain VR. “Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR. “Reversible JPEG”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG. Input the AE title of the host using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (default :65536). • Use the default value as it is. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. • “ASCII” • “Latin1” Select whether to send or not to send the private data. (default: Send) Copies the “C-STORE DICOM” setting, and overwrites.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 51

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.9

“HOST INFO • Image” Screen

Set the definition for the edition of the image to be sent according to the destination host. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Image] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Image Image Reduction Mode

Presentation Size Mode

Std. Illumination Std. RFL. AMB. Light Grid Suppression Annotation Printer (Sync.) E/F/H Processing Out of Shutter Out of Chest Wall Overlay (Marker1) Overlay (Marker2) Overlay (Stamp) Overlay (Scale/Grid) Trimming

15 - 52

Function Select the type of compression when sending the image data from the following. (default: SINC method) • “Spline”, “Decimate / Crop”, “Bilinear”, “SINC method”. Display method requested to the HOST. • MAGNIFY: Displays by magnifying. (100%) • SCALE TO FIT: Displays the image as large as possible to fit to the display area. • TRUE SIZE: Displays the image at the same size (mm) as read. Luminance of hypothetical illumination that is used in “P” value conversion. Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here. Luminance of hypothetical ambient light that is used in “P” value conversion. Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here. Select whether to suppress the grid mesh or not from the following. • “OFF”, “ON” Tick to embed the annotation in the output image. Reflects the print condition(image processing, overlay, etc.) that is set on “Detail Setting” screen to the output to the HOST. Select “ON” when outputting the same contents as used for printer to the HOST . (default: ON for “E/F/H Processing, “Masking (Out of Shutter)”, “Masking (Side of Chest)”, OFF for the rest)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.10 “HOST INFO • Output Setting” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Output Setting] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Queue Skip Error Queue

SOP Instance ID (Multihosts) Use Same SOP Stored Days Stored Days Action of Timeout

Function Set the reaction when an error occurs in output. (default: OFF) • ON: Skip the output queue which sent an error, and output the next queue. • OFF: Suspend the output until the error is corrected. Setting will vary depending on the host. Follow the instruction. Setting will vary depending on the host. Follow the instruction.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 53

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.11 “HOST INFO ・ Output Pixel” screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • •[Console] --> [Host] --> "Output Pixel" in the lower left menu

Key/Item Output Matrix Reading Pixel Size Output Pixel Size

Width Height

15 - 54

Function Select the image resolution. "175µm" (Standard), "87.5µm" (high-definition), “43.75µm” (option). Select the output pixel size from the following initial values. (Default value: Same as input) "Same as input", "87.5µm”, “175µm", "350µm" or enter a numeric value Use a numeric value to enter the output pixel size of the width side in the standard mode for each film size. Use a numeric value to enter the output pixel size of the height side in the standard mode for each film size.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8 [Console] > [RIS] 15.8.1

Common Settings of “RIS INFO” Screen

Key/Item RIS Selection (upper right menu) [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

15.8.2

Function Select the RIS name to be set. Related Settings; Exit from the “RIS INFO” screen after saving the setting. Exit from the “RIS INFO” screen without saving the setting.

“RIS INFO • Command” Screen

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Gateway Gateway to Others

Command Service Class

Function • OFF: Do not use the gateway program. • ON: Use the gateway program. • Dr. View: Use the gateway exclusive for Dr. View/RIS (Asahi Kasei Informations Systems) Select the DICOM Service class to be used. • Detached • • • Uses the “DICOM Detached”. • MWM)• • • Uses the “DICOM MWM”. • When “Gateway to Others” is ON, this setting is for Service Class used with the gateway program. • Depending on the selection, the menu in the left column changes as follows. The above screen image is when ”Detached” is selected. When "MWM” is selected, "Detached” in the menu is replaced with "MWM”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 55

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.3

“RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (Patient/Study)

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Timeout 2

Interval 1

15 - 56

Function Input the RIS name from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2 using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the RIS’s IP address from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2. Input the RIS’s port No.from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2. Input the duration (ms) for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 30000) Among the settings of time-out of duration before the RIS replies to the data request sent from CS-2, this particularly set the time-out(ms) before the CS-2 receives the patient/examination data from RIS. (default: 30000) • Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to “MWM”. Input the search interval (ms) in number. (default: 1000) • Valid when “MWM” is selected in “Service Class” of “Command”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.4

“RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (Patient/Study)

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [DICOM] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax RIS AE-Title REGIUS AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set

Function Select “Implicit VR Little Endian”. Input the AE title of the RIS using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. • Change disabled. Displays UID. • Change disabled. When “Service Class” of “Command” is set at “MWM”, select the character set from the following; • “ASCII” (fixed) • ”Latin1” “Latin 1” • When “Service Class” of “Command” is set to “Detached”, the received character set is reflected.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 57

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.5

”RIS INFO • Detached” Screen

This setting is required when “Detached” is selected in "Command", p.15-55. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Patient/Study” -->(Select [Detached] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Screen Control Auto Start Study

15 - 58

Function Sets whether to automatically start the study when receiving the order on the initial screen (Single image screen, multiimage screen). ON: Automatically start the study.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.6

“RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen

This setting is required when “Modality Worklist” is selected in "Command", p.15-55. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Patient/Study” -->(Select [Modality Worklist] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Search Trigger

Function Select the timing for the CS-2 to search the patient information. (default: Search) “Search” • • • Search will start when the user touches [Search] on the CS-2 application. “Search + Get List” (with auto-update) • • • In addition to the “Search” mode described above, search starts when “Update List” is touched and automatically starts searching at a specific interval (polling). "Search + Get List" (without auto-update) • • • In addition to "Search" mode, search starts when "Update List" is touched. (Auto search at a specific interval (polling) is not performed.)

Property (Get List) Scope of Searching

Station AE Title Property (search) Scope of Searching

AE Title

Set the scope of searching for patient information, which is manually implemented on the CS-2. (default: Not Specified ~ Not Specified) • This becomes valid only when the date/time for study data is set on the RIS side. Input the AE title which the RIS server uses to discriminate the CS-2. Set the scope of searching for patient information, which is automatically implemented on the CS-2. (default: Not Specified ~ Not Specified) • This becomes valid only when the date/time for study data is set on the RIS side. Input the AE title which the RIS server uses to discriminate the CS-2.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 59

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

Key/Item Exam Tag Convert Table

Convert Source Code

Ignore 1st Value

Ignore 2nd Value

[Excel File]

Serial No. Check Identical

15 - 60

Function Select the exposure condition code that shall be sent from the RIS. (default: DICOM) “DICOM (1 to 1)” • • • Code set & value “JJ1017 (3 to 1)” • • • JJ1017 Code (Method + Orientation + Body Parts) • When the RIS is using IDS, always select “DICOM”. Select the code type with which the CS-2 convert the exposure conditions into the exam. keys. “Scheduled Code” • • • Selects the scheduled item code to be executed. “Req. ID/Description • • • Selects the requested ID/Description code. “Req. Code • • • Selects USA standard method. • When the RIS is using IDS, always select “Scheduled Code”. Checking “ON” will neglect the 1st row of the conversion table when the exposure condition is converted into exam. tag on the CS-2. • When the RIS is using IDS, always select “OFF”. Checking “ON” will neglect the 2nd row of the conversion table when the exposure condition is converted into exam. tag on the CS-2. • When the RIS is using IDS, always select “OFF”. Reads pr writes in Excel format, the correspondence table (conversion table) to search the code used in the RIS from the body part or exam. tag used on the CS-2. • Opens “Body parts - Exam Tag Conversion” screen. • Check “ON” to handle the examination as separate when different exam. reservations are made under the same exam. instance UID.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.7

“[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” Screen

Click [Excel File] on Section 15.8.6, "“RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen" to open “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” screen.

Key/Item Exam Tag --> CSV File File Name [Browse...] [Export] CSV File--> Exam Tag File Name [Browse...] [Import] [Exit]

Function Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path. Opens the dialogue for opening the file, and specifies the save destination and the file name. Implements file export. Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path. Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path. Opens the dialogue for opening the file, and specifies the save destination and the file name. Implements file import. Exit “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” screen. • Automatically exit after implementing [Export] or [Import].

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 61

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.8

“RIS INFO • Command” Screen (Result)

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)

TB1BL-Table1BodyLeft1 Gateway Gateway to Others Command Service Class

15 - 62

Function Set to OFF. Select the DICOM Service class to be used. • Detached • • • Uses the “DICOM Detached”. • MWM)• • • Uses the “DICOM MPPS”. • Depending on the selection, the menu in the left column changes as follows. The above screen is when "Detached" is selected. When "MWM" is selected, "Detached" in the menu is replaced with "MWM".

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.9

“RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (result)

Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name IP Address Port Number Timeout 1 Interval 1

Function Input the RIS name from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2 using 1 byte x 32 characters. Input the RIS’s IP address from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2. Input the RIS’s port No.from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2. Input the duration (ms) for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it received the data correctly. (default: 30000) Input the output interval (msec). (default: 1000)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 63

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.10 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (result) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [DICOM] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item DICOM Transfer Syntax RIS AE-Title REGIUS AE-Title PDU Size Version Name UID Character Set

15 - 64

Function Select the Transfer Syntax. Only “Implicit VR Little Endian” is available at the moment. Input the AE title of the RIS(s) using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets. Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”. Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”. Change disabled. Displays UID. Change disabled. Select the character set from the following; “ASCII” “Latin1”

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.11 “RIS INFO • Detached” Screen (result) This setting is required when “Detached” is selected in "Service Class", p.15-62. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [Detached] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Detached Patient DB Registration

Notify [Completed Study]

Function Select whether to register the patient info that is changed on the CS on the DB of RIS. • ON: Patiient info changed on the CS will also be registered on the patien DB of RIS. • OFF: Only the patient info that is newly input on the CS will be registered on the patient DB of RIS. Check “ON” to notify the RIS of completion of the study. (default: OFF)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 65

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.12 “RIS INFO • MPPS” Screen (result) This setting is required when “MPPS” is selected in "Service Class", p.15-62. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [MPPS] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item MPPS Send

Send Exposure Dose Send as Cancel Send Performed Code Continue on Other CS-2 Send Film Consumption

Send Study Deletion

Issue SOP Instance UID

15 - 66

Function Select the timing with which the exam. result will be sent to the RIS. (default: After Output com-pleted) None Sending • • • Sends only the exposure start signal. After Image Confirmed • • • Sends when [OK] button is clicked on the “Exposed Image Confirma-tion” screen. After Output completed • • • sends when the output to the host or printer is completed. • Enabled when “MPPS” is selected in “Service Class”. Check “ON” to include the X-ray dose in the exam. result. (default: OFF) Set whether to notify Discont. to RIS using a method that does not conform to DICCOM. (Initial value: OFF) CheNot availableck “ON” when the interruption information of PPS is sent. This selection is enabled by select-ing. (Default: ON) Not available Check “ON” to send the film consumption (sheets) to the RIS. (default: ON) Note: Valid when the service class is “MPPS”. Check “ON” to delete the examination from reser-vation list on the RIS when it is deleted on the “Exam List” screen . (default: ON) Note: Valid when the service class is “MPPS”. Check “ON” so that the CS-2 issues the UID which associates the Study Comepltes to Study Start of the MPPS.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.9 [Console] > [Density]

15.9 [Console] > [Density] 15.9.1

Common Settings of “MARKER INFO” Screen

IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before starting this setting.

Key/Item Output Destination Selection (upper right menu) [Import]

Function Select the output destination name on which the marker is set.

[Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Exit from the “MARKER INFO” screen after saving the setting. Exit from the “MARKER INFO” screen without saving the setting.

15.9.2

Click on this button to copy the existing marker setting, and to apply this setting to the other device. • Upon clicking, a window to select the copy original and copy destination will be shown.

“MARKER INFO • Overlay Set” Screen

Apply the same settings for “R/L marker”, “Ori. Marker”, “Stamp”. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Density] -->(Select [Overlay] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item Overlay

Function Select the overlay type from the following. Overwrite on the image data . . Writes the overlay information as a part of image. Embed in the image data . . . . . Embeds the overlay information in the vacant bits of the image data.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 67

15.9 [Console] > [Density]

Key/Item Overlay Method Background Density Character Density Dmin Dmax

15.9.3

Function Select this setting enables the alteration of the overlay information later. Input the density value for the background of the marker. Input the density of the marker text. Input the lowest density of the image. Input the highest density of the image.

“MARKER INFO • Stamp Position” Screen

Set screen for setting the display position of R/L, Ori. markers. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Density] -->(Select [Stamp Position] in the lower left menu.)

Key/Item DCM

Function Appears when the host is selected in the “Output Target” menu. Tick this box to enable the Stamp setting to be interlocked with the printer. • “Overlay 1”setting interlocked with the printer in the “HOST INFO • Image” screen will also be changed.

Stamp OFF/ON X Offset

Y Offset

15 - 68

Select (check) the position on the film where the stamp will be printed. Input the shifting amount (mm) to horizontally shift the stamp position from the current setting. • Affix (-) to shift to the left. Input the shifting amount (mm) to vertically shift the stamp position from the current setting. • Affix (-) to shift to the upper.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp] 15.10.1 “Stamp Infomation” Screen IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the setting. (Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save” Screen") Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp]

Key/Item Settings Output Devices Check Box (enable) Stamp No. Edit Screen Screen Select

[Edit]

Stamp Copy [Copy]

Function Cannot be set. Cannot be set. Select (check) the stamp No. that will be selectable on the “Stamp Select” screen of the CS-2 application. Select the stamp No. to be set. • Select the stamp No. to show its sample on the lower part of the screen. Select the screen on which the stamp is set. “Format” ••• Selects the screen on which the overall stamp size (lines), etc. is set. “Detail” ••• Selects the screen on which stamp items in detail is set. Displays the screen selected by “Screen Select”, and enables to edit on the screen. “Format” ••• Displays the screen on which the overall stamp size (lines), etc. is set. “Detail” ••• Displays the screen on which stamp items in detail is set.

Use this button to copy the existing stamp setting, and apply to the other device. • Click to open the copied screen of the setting.

Sample Display [Preview]

[Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Click this button to see the text size, etc., with which you can simulate the actual output. • Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the bit map of the selected stamp sample. Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Information” screen after saving the setting. Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Information” screen without saving the setting.

IMPORTANT Do not deselect "(Valid)" for the "Valid/Invalid” field.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 69

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

15.10.2 “Stamp Format” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp] --> Select [Format] in the screen select menu --> [Edit]

Key/Item Stamp Size Total Lines Width Font Size per Line 1 ~ 6 line Others Alignment

[Refresh] [Preview]

[Exit]

[Cancel]

Function Input the total number of lines for stamp. (1 ~ 6 lines) Input the length (mm) of the display area for the stamp. Input the text height (mm) for each line. Select the line alignment for the stamp block from the following. “default (left-aligned)” ••• Align the line to the left. “Center (center-aligned)” ••• Align the line to the center. Clicking on this button will update the sample display shown on the lower margin of the screen. Click this button to see the text size, etc., with which you can simulate the actual output. Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the bit map of the selected stamp sample. Click this button to exit from the “Gen. Setting” screen after temporary saving the setting. The setting will not be saved until [Save & Exit] is clicked under [Console] > [Stamp], p.15-69. Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Format” screen without saving the setting.

• “Total Lines”, “Width” and “Font Size per Line” can be set independently. Therefore, it may happen that the character line does not fit to the stamp area depending on the setting. For those items such as “Patient Name”, “Patient ID”, etc. that are not fixed in character count, check that all characters presuming the longest can fit to the stamp area.

15 - 70

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

15.10.3 “Set Stamp” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be changed Using the user Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp] --> Select [Detail] in the screen select menu --> [Edit].

Key/Item Check Box (enable) Item Stamp Layout Row Column

Length Options

Sample String

[Refresh] [Preview]

[OK]

[Cancel]

Function Select (check) from 60 items to be included in the stamp. For No.41 onward, you can set any character strings. Select the item(DICOM defined or KonicaMinolta defined items) that shall be displayed in the stamp(refer to the “Item Name List”) Specify the starting line of display (vertical) by line (line counts from the top). (“Comment Ttl Lines” of Section 15.10.2, "“Stamp Format” Screen", p.15-70.) Specified the starting raw of display (horizontal) by raw (1 byte character counts from the left end). When several items are set for one line, the item with lesser numbers input will be displayed on the left. Specify the display width of item by number of 1 byte characters. Select the display forms. The display type will be different depending on the setting of “Item Name”. (refer to the “Item Name List”) No.1~40: Input the sample characters in each item that shall be exhibited on sample display(Reload) and bit map(Preview) display. No.41~60: Input the characters free from the item, which will displayed on the stamp. Clicking on this button will update the sample display shown on the lower margin of the screen. Click this button to see the text size, etc., with which you can simulate the actual output. Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the bit map of the selected stamp sample. Click this button to exit from the “Set Stamp” screen after temporary saving the setting. The setting will not be saved until the “OK” is clicked under [Console] > [Stamp], p.1569. Click this button to exit from the “Set Stamp” screen without saving the setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 71

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

•

Item Name List ITEM

Study Date Image Date Study Time Image Time Accession Number Institution Name Institution Address Referring Physician Station Name Department Name Recording Physician Performing Physician Reading Study Phys. Operator's Name DiagnosesDescription Model Name Patient's Name Patient ID Patient's Birth Date Patient's Birth Time Patient's Sex Other Patient ID Other Patient Names Patient's Age Patient's Height Patient's Weight Medical Alerts Contrast Allergies Ethnic Group Occupation Add. Patient History Pregnancy Status Patient Comments Contrast/Bolus Agent Body Part Examined KVP Serial Number Software Versions C/B Route C/B Volume(cm3) C/B Start Time C/B Stop Time C/B Total Dose Field of View-Col Mag. Factor (x100) Field of View Shape Field of View-Row Source-Patient [mm]

15 - 72

DICOM TAG NR; DICOM VM 0008,0020:1 0008,0023:1 0008,0030:1 0008,0033:1 0008,0050:1 0008,0080:1 0008,0081:1 0008,0090:1 0008,1010:1 0008,1040:1 0008,1048:1 0008,1050:1 0008,1060:1 0008,1070:1 0008,1080:1 0008,1090:1 0010,0010:1 0010,0020:1 0010,0030:1 0010,0032:1 0010,0040:1 0010,1000:1 0010,1001:1 0010,1010:1 0010,1020:1 0010,1030:1 0010,2000:1 0010,2110:1 0010,2160:1 0010,2180:1 0010,21B0:1 0010,21C0:1 0010,4000:1 0018,0010:1 0018,0015:1 0018,0060:1 0018,1000:1 0018,1020:1 0018,1040:1 0018,1041:1 0018,1042:1 0018,1043:1 0018,1044:1 0018,1149:2 0018,1114:1 0018,1147:1 0018,1149:1 0018,1111:1

DISPLAY STYLE B B C C A A A D A A D D D D A A D A B C A A D E A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A C C

A A A A

ITEM

DICOM TAG NR; DICOM VM

X-ray Tube Current Exposure Rectification Type Image Area Dose Prod Filter Type Pixel Spacing-Row Pixel Spacing-Col Grid Focal Spot Anode Material Breast Thickness Pressure Phosphor Type Cassette Orientation Read Size Detector Primary Angle View Position Sensitivity Detector ID Grid Absorb.Material Grid SpacingMaterial Grid Thickness Grid Pitch Grid AspectRatio-V Grid AspectRatio-H Grid Focal Distance Filter Material Filter Thickness Min Filter Thickness Max Exposure Ctrl Mode Exposure Status Study Instance UID Series Instance UID Study ID Series Number Instance ID Pat. Orientation-1st Pat. Orientation-2nd Laterality Image Laterality Other Study ID Image Comment Num. of Image Contrast Flow Rate Contrast Flow Dur. C/B Ingredient C/B Concentration QC Image

0018,1151:1 0018,1152:1 0018,1156:1 0018,115E:1 0018,1160:1 0018,1164:1 0018,1164:2 0018,1166:1 0018,1190:1 0018,1191:1 0018,11A0:1 0018,11A2:1 0018,1261:1 0018,1402:1 0018,1403:1 0018,1510:1 0018,5101:1 0018,6000:1 0018,700A:1 0018,7040:1 0018,7041:1 0018,7042:1 0018,7044:1 0018,7046:1 0018,7046:2 0018,704C:1 0018,7050:1 0018,7052:1 0018,7054:1 0018,7060:1 0018,7064:1 0020,000D:1 0020,000E:1 0020,0010:1 0020,0011:1 0020,0013:1 0020,0020:1 0020,0020:2 0020,0060:1 0020,0062:1 0020,1070:1 0020,4000:1 0021,1052:1 0018,1046:1 0018,1047:1 0018,1048:1 0018,1049:1 0028,0300:1

DISPLAY STYLE A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A _ A A A A A A A A A _ A A A A A

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

ITEM

Reason for Study Requesting Physician Requesting Service Study Comments Special Needs Cur. Patient Location Pat. Residence(Ward) Patient State Total Exposure Dur. Total Exposure Num. Exposure Time Entrance Dose Exposed Area Source-Entrance [mm] Radiation Comments Transport Arrange. Recipients of Result Placer Order Number Filler Order Number Inc. Plane Dose(mGy) Pat.Confidentiality Medium Type Film Size ID Number of Films Set Exam Tag Num Set Page Name Set Group Name Set Tag Name User Exam Tag Num User Page Name User Group Name User Tag Name XrayCtrlCode Tube Num AEC Position Guard Rows Columns

DICOM TAG NR; DICOM VM 0032,1030:1 0032,1032:1 0032,1033:1 0032,4000:1 0038,0050:1 0038,0300:1 0038,0400:1 0038,0500:1 0040,0300:1 0040,0301:1 0018,1150:1 0040,0302:1 0040,0303:1 0040,0306:1 0040,0310:1 0040,1004:1 0040,1010:1 0040,2016:1 0040,2017:1 0040,8302:1 0040,3001:1 2000,0030:1 2010,0050:1 2100,0170:1

0028,0010:1 0028,0011:1

DISPLAY STYLE A D A A A A A A A _ A A A _ _ D _ _ A A _ _ _ A A A A A A A A A A _ A A A

ITEM

Study Priority Sched.StudyStartDate Sched.StudyStartTime Refer. Pending Study Pending Host Pending Output Device Img Confirm mode Source-Detector [mm] Input Distinguish Img Confirm screen Internal Img No. Mag.mode(integer) Mag.mode(float) ExamTag Group ExamTag Name LUT Name DL(G-Process) DH(G-Process) S-Value G-Value Shift Rotate E ON/OFF F ON/OFF E bl E bh E MaskSize F b1 F b2 F MaskSize H ID (HE or HF) HF-STANDARD HE-STANDARD HF-b2 HF-b1 HE-bh HE-bl

DICOM TAG NR; DICOM VM 0032,000C:1 0032,1000:1 0032,1001:1

0018,1110:1

DISPLAY STYLE A B C A A A A A A A A _ _ A A _ _ A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

• Blank cells in the “DICOM TAG NR: DICOM VM” column indicate the items are unique to KonicaMinolta. • For display styles that can be selected in “DISPLAY STYLE”, refer to the following tables. (“−“ indicates that the selection of display style is not available)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 73

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

• A

List Undefined

B

"Date(JP-YYYY)"

Convert to Hex

"Date(JP-YY)"

2-byte Character

"Date(JP-JP)"

Devided by 100

"Date(US-YYYY)"

Decimal down 2

"Date(US-YY)"

OFF/ON

"Date(US-JP)"

Yes/No

"Date(UK-YYYYY)"

Marker Position

"Date(UK-YY)"

(Sex Entry)

"Date(UK-JP)"

"Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)" C

"Time(JP-HH+MM)" "Time(HH-MM-SS)" "Time(HH-MM)" "Name/JP1(2byte)"

D

"Name/JP2(Kana1)" "Name/JP3(Kana2)" "Name"

Sex Entry E

"Age" "Age"

15 - 74

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag] 15.11.1 "Exam Tag Setup” Screen IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the settings (Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save” Screen"). Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam Tag]

Key/Item

Body Part Exam Tag List

Selection Scope Selection All Exam Tag Name [Search] [IDS] [Property] [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Function Selecting the body parts from the combo box will restrict the display of the exam. tags. The status of the exam. tags registered on the CS-2 will be described in different colors. Text Colors : White • • • Indicates this is an original Exam Tag key of the REGIUS Master. Orange • • • Indicates this is a key copied from an original Exam Tag. • The key selected on the list will be displayed in blue regardless of the key origin as shown above. Double-clicking the selected key will open the “Detail Setting” window of that key. Background Colors : Dark Green • • • Indicates the Exam Tag key has been registered as a set key (a key to be displayed on the “Body Part/Order Select” screen). Black • • •Indicates the key is not registered as a set key (not assigned). Select from the following, the exam. tags to which the altered setting is applied. Applies the changes to the currently selected keys. Applies changes to all keys. Applies changes to the key whose key name is input. Starts search. Exports the Exam Tag as a compressed file. • Displays the IDS export dialogue. • Clicking on this button after selecting the exam. tag will display the “Detailed Setting” screen (1/3). Exit the “Exam Tag Setup” screen after saving the changes of Exam. Tags. Exit the “Exam Tag Setup” screen without saving the changes of Exam. Tags.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 75

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

Serial No. of keys (raw) Digits from the right end 1 ~ 2 digits 3 ~ 4th digits 5 ~ 6th digits 7 ~ 8th digits 9th digit 10 ~ 12th digits 13~ 15th digits 16~ 17th digits

18th digit

15 - 76

An identical serial number (18 digits) is assigned to each exam. tag. Descriptions Copy history. Increments by “1” each time it is copied. Spare Orientation Technical method Right and left Body parts 2 (corresponds to a group) Body parts 1 (corresponds to a general classification) Machine code; 00: Old machines (REGIUS 150) 01: New machines (REGIUS 170) Modality 1: Cassette, 2: Erect 3: Recumbent

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/4) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property]

Key/Item ExamTag Information Read Information Output Information

Study Information [Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

Function Input the names for user exposure condition, group, page. Set various information regarding the reading from the reader device. • Set various conditions for output. • Clicking on the “Dev. Set Up” will display the “Device Set” screen. (refer to “Output Device Information” Screen, p.15-78 ) To specify the body parts, select the body part to be examined in the dialogue which will be displayed by clicking the “Part Select”. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new setup reflected to the exam. tag key. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 4/4” screen. Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/4” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 77

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.3 “Output Device Information” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

IMPORTANT Output format of the CS-2 is not maintained in the Exam Tag keys but follows format set in the “Image Confirm” screen. This means the settings made for the output size, output orientation, output mode as well as the magnification type are all neglected. Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Dev. Setup]

Key/Item Output Device Selection Box Operational Setting [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

NOTE

Function Select the output device to be set. Select in the combo box, and set various conditions for the output device regarding output counts, output size, trimming, image processing, etc. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new setup reflected to the exam. tag key. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup.

Do not change the setting of stamp, marker 1 or marker 2.

15 - 78

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.4 “Study Parts Select” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Body Part]

Key/Item Body Part List [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Function Select the body part to be examined in the table. Click this button to exit from the “Study Parts Select”screen with the newly selected body part reflected to the exam. tag key. Click this button to exit from the “Study Parts Select” screen without updating the setup.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 79

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.5 “Detail Setup” Screen (2/4) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page]

Key/Item ExamTag X-Ray Filter X-Ray Grid X-ray Result Auto Search Key

[Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

15 - 80

Function Set various detailed information for image reading and X-ray generator device. Set various information for X-ray filter. Set various information for X-ray grid Use this key to allocate the exposure result to the exam tag key in conjunction with the Xray exposure device for mammography. Input the key to search the orientation information obtained from the X-ray exposure device for mammography. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new setup reflected to the exam. tag key. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 1/4” screen. Proceed to “Detail Setup 3/4” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.6 “Detail Setup” Screen (3/4) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page]

Key/Item Processing Name Image Contrast/ Bolus 2-Dimensional Calibration [Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

Function Select the process parameters in the dialogue that will be displayed by clicking on the “Process Select”. Setting for patient orientation, etc. SettingCannot be useds for contrast medium and bolus. Cannot be used Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new setup reflected to the exam. tag key. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/4” screen. Proceed to “Detail Setup 1/4” screen.

IMPORTANT Do not use “Select”. For an exam.tag key with which auto recognition of the subject is not performed, “Select” is grayed out.

15.11.7 “Process Select” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page] --> [Select] IMPORTANT Do not use the Select screen. Press [Cancel] to exit the screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 81

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.8 Detail Setup screen (4/4) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service ScrExam. Tageen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [Exam. Tag] → Select Exam. Tag → [Property] → [Next Page] → [Next Page] → [Next Page]

Key/Item Recognition of Body Part Setting of Recognition of Body Part Category Processing

[Delete]

[Save&Exitt] [Cancel] [PrvePage] [Next Page]

Function Do not change the setting.

Displays operation type of auto recognition of body part (cannot be set). Displays a list of image processing parameters that can be candidates for auto recognition of body part assigned to the applicable Exam. Tag. For Exam. tags other than the original, image processing parameters can be deleted. However, at least one image processing parameter must remain. Used to delete image processing parameters that are recognition candidates for the subject auto recognition processing. This setting, however, is only effective for Exam. Tags other than the originals. Reflect the changed content to Exam. Tag and close the Detail Setup screen. Changed content is reflected in Exam. Tag and the Detail Setup screen is closed. Close the Detail Setup screen without updating the settings. Display the Detail Setup screen (3/4). Display the Detail Setup screen (1/4).

IMPORTANT Targets are only Exam. Tags created by copying and also Exam. Tag that perform subject auto recognition.

15 - 82

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12 [Console] > [Process] 15.12.1 “Process Parameter Setup” Screen IMPORTANT “Process Parameter Setup” screen of “Service Tool” is a screen on which process parameters can be changed en masse. IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the settings. (Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save” Screen") Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process]

Key/Item Process Parameter List

Selection Scope Selection All Process [Search] [Property] [Overwrite]

Function Text Colors White • • • Indicates this is an original Exam Tag key of the REGIUS Master. Orange • • • Indicates this is a key copied from an original Exam Tag. • The key selected on the list will be displayed in blue regardless of the key origin as shown above. Double-clicking the selected key will open the “Detail Setting” window of that key. Background Colors Dark Green • • • Indicates the Exam Tag key has been registered as a set key (a key to be displayed on the “Body Part/Order Select” screen). Black • • •Indicates the key is not registered as a set key (not assigned). Select from the following, the exam. tags to which the altered setting is applied. Changes applied to the currently selected keys. Changes applied to all keys. Input the process name (text) to be searched Starts searching. Clicking on this button after selecting the exam. tag will display the “Detail Setting” screen (1/5). Overwrite the selected process parameter with Regius Master. • Restores the process parameters that have been manipulated by the user to the original REGIUS master.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 83

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

Key/Item [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Function Exit from the “Processing Setup” screen after saving the changes of the process parameters. Exit from the “Processing Setup” screen without saving the changes of the process parameters.

15.12.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/5) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property]

Key/Item Process Information Irradiation Field Confirmation Parameter ROI (A/B) Parameter [Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

15 - 84

Function Input the process name. ON/OFF setting of the flag for reprocessing is capable in the detailed setting. Various settings for irrad. field recognition parameters. Various settings for body part recognition parameters. Selectable from A and B. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to process parameter. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 5/5” page. Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/5” page.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12.3 “Detail Setup” Screen (2/5) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page”

Key/Item Gray-scale (A/B) Calc. SG-Value Limitation Judgement Parameter Partition Pattern Identification Parameter [Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

Function Various settings for calculation parameters. Selectable from A and B. Input the higher and lower limits for S-value and G-value in numbers. Input the judge parameter in numbers. Select from ON/OFF of the sepa. recog. parameter and input the parameter in numbers when “ON” selected. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to process parameter. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 1/5” page. Proceed to “Detail Setup 3/5” page.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 85

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12.4 “Detail Setup” Screen (3/5) Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page” x 2

Key/Item Image Orientation Discrimination Parameter Image Parameter Description Learning Parameter Initialize

Learning Stop

[Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

15 - 86

Function Select from ON/OFF of the image ori. recog. parameter and input the parameter in numbers when “ON” selected. Select “Use” or “No Use”. Return image processing parameter values that were set to user’s preference by the auto learning function to the default values. Select "ON" or "OFF". Set this item to ON in order not to use the auto learning function further after image processing parameters are finalized to the user’s preference by the auto learning function. ON: Stops the auto learning function OFF: Runs the auto learning function Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to process parameter. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/5” page. Proceed to “Detail Setup 4/5” page.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12.5 “Detail Setup” Screen (4/5) IMPORTANT Those except for the set items described here are strictly banned from changing. Pay attention when implementing set-ups. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page” x 3

Key/Item G-Process Parameter

E-Process Parameter

[Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

Function Set the G-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd Image. Items that can be changed here are following four items. • “Basic LUT” • “Rot. Value [x100]” • “DL [x100]” • “DH [x100]” Set the E-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd-image. Items that can be changed here are following three items. • “Mask Size” • “ß l” • “ß h” Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to process parameter. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 3/5” page. Proceed to “Detail Setup 5/5” page.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 87

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12.6 “Detailed Setting” Screen (5/5) IMPORTANT Those except for the set items described here are strictly banned from changing. Pay attention when implementing set-ups. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page” x 4

Key/Item F-Process Parameter

H-Process Parameter

[Save & Exit] [Cancel] [Previous Page] [Next Page]

15 - 88

Function • Set the G-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd Image. Items that can be changed here are following four items. • “Basic LUT” • “Rot. Value [x100]” • “DL [x100]” • “DH [x100]” Set the H-process parameter respectively for main image and sub-image. Items that can be changed here are following six items. • “Preset E” • “Preset F” • “ß 1” • “e ß l” • “ß 2” • “e ß h” Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to process parameter. Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup. Proceed to “Detail Setup 4/5” page. Proceed to “Detail Setup 1/5” page.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway]

15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway] 15.13.1 Gateway to Others main menu screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [Gateway] This screen is used to set the ID-680SAN module. When setting Gateway to Others to “ON” using Section 15.7, "[Console] > [Host]" or Section 15.8, "[Console] > [RIS]" and then start up the CS-2, [Gateway] is displayed in “Option” in the Service Tool screen (Console). Refer to Section 8.9.1, "Maker/Product Relation Table".

Key/Item [MWM Controller Setting]

[Storage Controller Setting]

[Exit]

Function Set to obtain patient information from a medical system or electronic medical record system. This setting can be selected only when Gateway to Others is set to ON in Section 15.8, "[Console] > [RIS]". Set to send images of Jpeg, etc. to an electronic medical record system. This setting can be selected only when Gateway to Others is set to ON in Section 15.8, "[Console] > [RIS]". Closes the main menu screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 89

15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway]

15.13.2

MWM Controller Setting screen

Key/Item

Setting MC System Conf

Setting MWM Calling AE-Title Called AE-Title Port Number Setting Medical Statement Computer IP Address Port Number Data Section Setting FTP

15 - 90

Function Set devices from which patient information is obtained. "Sanyo Medicom (CS1:MWM)" ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Sanyo Medicom Newve "BML(CS1:MWM) [Patient DB search]" ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ BML(Merits) "Toshiba (MEPIO/CS1:MWM) [Patient DB search]" ・ Toshiba MEPIO "Other: FTP/CS1:Detached" ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ General IF (DETACHED) "Other: FTP/CS1:MWM [Patient DB search]" ・ ・ ・ ・ General IF (MWM) "Other: FTP/CS1:MWM [File search]" ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ General IF (MWM) Load the initial value of the system after setting the system configuration. Set the following Patient/Study items when a setting other than “Other: FTP/CS1: Detached" is set for the system configuration. Set “MWM” in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen, Service Class. Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, REGIUS ETitle. Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, RIS AE-Title. Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen, Port Number. Set the following items when “Sanyo Medicom (CS2:MWM)" is set for the system configuration. Set the IP address of the receiving computer. Set the port number of the receiving computer. Set the data segmentation of the receiving computer. Set the following items when an item other than "Sanyo Medicom (CS2:MWM)" is set for the system configuration.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway]

Key/Item

Receive Folder [．．． ] File Mask Save Folder [．．． ] File Extension Punctuation Mark Setting Detached

Send AE Title ReceiveAE Title ReceiveAE Title Receive Port Number CSV Setting [Detail] [Save] [Cancel]

Function Specify the folder to which the obtained patient information files are saved. (Initial value:..\Ftp) Display the browser used to select the received folder. Set a part of the file name in the patient information file. This setting is used to filter unnecessary files. Specify a file to save already used patient information files. (Initial value:..Ftp_save) Display the browser used to select the Save folder. Set the file type (extension) for the patient information file. This setting is used to filter unnecessary files. Specify the the code to separate search items. Set the following items when "Other: FTP/CS1:Detached" is selected for the system configuration. Set “Detached” for the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen, Service Class, RIS AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, RIS AE-Title. screen. Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, REGIUS AETitle. Always set "127.0.0.1". Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS](Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen, Port Number. Display the auto login setting screen for shared folders on the network. Display the Details Setup screen. Apply the set content and closes the MWM Controller Setting screen . Closes the MWM Controller Setting screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 91

15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB]

15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB] 15.14.1 “Patient DB Import” Screen This tool is used to import the patient DB registered in the external DB, and reregister it in the CS-2’s internal patient DB. Use this function in the following cases. (refer to "²Import Procedures of Patient DB", p.15-95 for import procedures) • When only one CS-2 is present in the institute. • When no RIS(IDS) is interfaced to the system. • The existing device of the institute already has the patient DB, and CS-2 imports this DB at the time of installation. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [ [Console] --> [Patient DB]

Key/Item DB Form

Set Item

Read Start Position Start Byte Read Byte Birth Date Format Male Female 0 padding Number Only [w/o 0 Padding] Space Correction [ASCII]

15 - 92

Function Select the patient information file format which will be registered in the patient DB. Separated Data: Handle the data up to the bound symbol as one identical item. Select the bound symbol in the right menu. (comma or tab) Specify the Start Byte: Select when specify the position of the item by means of byte count in the file. Patient ID Click and select this item to load the patient ID. Patient Name Click and select this item to load the alphabetical name. Birth Date Click and select this item to load the birth day (y/m/d) Sex Click and select this item to load the sex. Input the position of each items in the file by byte. • Will be displayed when “Bound Symbol” is selected for the read method. Input the start position of each item by byte. • Will be displayed when “Specify Start Byte” is selected for the read method. Input the length of each item by byte. • Will be displayed when “Specify Start Byte” is selected for the read method. Select the display format of the birthday from the list. Input the code that expresses the sex of the patient for both male and female. Checking default will use preset codes (male: m, female: f) Input the digits of the patient ID. When the read patient ID has less digits than the setting, registers the data with “0” added to the head. Input is enabled when the “Omit Head “0” is disabled. Click this item to abstract and save the figure data only of the patient ID. Click this item to omit the head “0” and save the rest of the patient ID. Click this item to automatically add a space between family and given names of the patient. It also cuts off unnecessary spaces. Click this item to automatically convert the name to ASCII code and save it if original ASCII name is not found.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB]

Key/Item [Get Data from DB] [Get Data from DB (Test)] [Restore] [Save Setting] [Exit]

Function Reads the file in which the patient information is input, and registers it in the patient DB. Displays the “Patient database” screen. Partially reads the file in which the patient information is input, and verifies the format set up is correct or not. Displays a confirmation screen for the format of the read data. Loads the format which is already registered in the CS-2. Saves the set up of format in the CS-2. Exit the “BD Format Setting” screen.

15.14.2 “Patient Data Base” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Get Data from DB]

Key/Item [Refer...] [Import] Import All Files [Exit]

Function Displays the reference dialogue,. Select a holder where the patient information file (.dat) is saved. Reads the patient information file, and registers in the patient DB. Progressive bar will be shown to indicate saving while registering. Check this item to read all files (.dat) stored in the holder that is selected in “Refer...”, and to register in the patient DB. Exit the “Patient Database”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 93

15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB]

15.14.3 “OK (Test Data Base)” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Get Data from DB (Test)]

Key/Item Imported Test Data Base Error Log [Close]

15 - 94

Function Imports the data base, and display the data base classified according to the format. Displays errors when it failed to import the data base according to the format. Exit the “OK (Test Data Base)” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB]

• Import Procedures of Patient DB 1.

Load the Patient DB from the external device, and copy it onto a floppy disk. • When copying, make sure to add “dat” to the file as an extension.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Set “DB Form” through “Sex” of “Patient DB Import” screen according to the data form of the patient DB. Click [Save Setting] to save the setting. Insert the floppy disk in which the patient DB has been copied, and click [Get Data from DB(Test)] of “Patient DB Import” screen. A dialogue querying whether to open file will be shown. Select the file that is copied in the step1, and click [Open]. • Selected and loaded data will be shown on “OK(Test Data Base)” screen.

6.

If the data is not read in correct form, check the data format of the copied data, and make necessary changes on settings of “Patient DB Import” screen. 7. Repeat the step4 and 5 until the patient data base is correctly displayed on the “OK(Test Data Base)” screen. 8. Click [Get Data from DB]. 9. Click [Refer. . .] of “Patient Database” screen, and select the file that is copied in the step1. Then click [Open]. 10. Click [Import] of “Patient Database” screen to register the patient DB in the CS-2's data base.

15.14.4 “Export Patient DB” Screen This is a tool with which the patient information stored as Patient DB in the CS-2 can be output in text form. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Export Patient DB] --> [OK]

Key/Item File Name [File. . . ] [Export] [Exit]

Function Displays the file name of the patient DB(text format) with path suffixed. Opens the dialogue, spoecify the file name and destination to export the file. Executes the export of the file. Exit the “Export Patient DB” screen. “Export Patient DB” screen automatically closes when [Export] is executed and completed.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 95

15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]]

15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]] 15.15.1 “Install File” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [File Import]

Key/item [...] (reference key) [OK] [Cancel]

Function Select the holder where the install program resides. Normally select from “A” drive (floppy disk drive). The selected program will be decompressed. Exit the “Install File” screen without selecting the file.

IMPORTANT Selecting the file and clicking [OK] on this screen will decompress the file stored in the floppy disk and copy it on the CS-2’s HDD. This, however does not update the program software. Always use “Control Program” screen to implement the program alteration (version change) .

15.15.2 “Control Program” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Upgrade]

Key/Item The current installed [OK] [Cancel]

15 - 96

Function A version list for the CS-2 application and Service Tool software that are installed on the CS-2. Switches to the version that is selected here. Executes the change of the version that is selected in the list. Exit the “Control Program” screen without installing the program.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.16 [Console] > [License]

15.16 [Console] > [License] 15.16.1 License Manager screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [License]

Key/Item [Append] [Edit] [Delete] [Import] [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Function Registers a new license key. Edits the registered license key. Deletes the registered license key. Imports the license file generated by the license server. Closes the License Manager screen. Closes the License Manager screen without saving the settings.

IMPORTANT This screen is not used because the license key for all functions is set by the factory setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 97

15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”

15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader” 15.17.1 Common Displays of “CCU INFO” Screen

Key/Item Reader Device Selection (upper left menu) [Save & Exit] [Cancel]

Function Select the reader device name to be set. Click this button to exit from “ICU Info” screen after saving the setting. Click this button to exit from “ICU Info” screen without saving the setting.

15.17.2 “CCU INFO • TCP/IP” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Reader] --> select “TCP/IP” in the left menu)

Key/Item TCP/IP Host Name (Hosts) Host Name (JM) IP Address Port Number (Reader) Port Number (Console) Timeout 1

15 - 98

Function Input the host name of REGIUS 170 using 1 byte x 32 characters. (default: R170-0001) Input the host name of REGIUS 170, which the JM uses, using 1 byte x 32 characters. (default: r170-0001) Input the REGIUS 170’s IP address. (default: 192.168.20.170) Input the REGIUS 170’s port No. (default: 8018) Input the CS-2’s port No. (default: 8018) Do not change unless otherwise instructed. (default: 180000)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup]

15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup] 15.18.1 “Device Set” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Device] --> (select the reader name from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item PLL Auto calculate ‘Mammo’ PLL value by ‘General’ PLL value. General (velocity 1.5x)

Mammo (velocity 1.0x)

Reader Start Point Resolution

Sign

Pixels (High) [Send] [Table Refer...]

Function Check to automatically calculate the PLL for mammo exposure (High Res.) from the PLL for standard exposure. Input the PLL pixel clock for the pixels of main scan direction of High Res. exposure. (standard: 3216) • The relation between the pixels and the PLL set value is roughly expressed as ; Pixels (87.5µm) = PLL Set Value x 1.3 Input the PLL pixel clock for the pixels of main scan direction of Mammo. exposure. (standard: 2222) • When “Calculate x1.0 PLL from x1.5 PLL” is disabled, input can be made. Select the resolution for which the Reader Start Point is specified from “All”, “175mm (Gen-Std.)”, “87.5mm (Gen-H/Mammo Std)”, “43.75mm (Mammo-H)”. • When “All” is selected, input the pixels for high resolution. Select the shift direction of the read start position. +: Toward H_sync -: Recedes from H_sync Input the shift amount of read start position by “pixel count x 2”. Sends the set up value to REGIUS 170. Reads and displays the data stored in SCB (CF) of REGIUS 170.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 99

15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup]

•

How to set the PLL

• Expose the 14” x 17"(14" x 14") cassette to produce solid density using high resolution mode, measure the size of fluorescent substance using an inspection tool. • Change the PLL so that the measured size of the fluorescent substance falls within the allowance (4096 pixels -5 to +10).

•

How to adjust the read start position

• Expose the 14" x 17" cassette in high resolution mode, and measure the blank margin of the plate of the H_sync using an inspection tool. • Set the code and pixel count so that the measurement falls within the allowance (30 to 45 pixels). IMPORTANT Always implement the unevenness calibration whenever the PLL setting or read start position setting is changed.

15 - 100

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.19 [Reader] > [PCB]

15.19 [Reader] > [PCB] 15.19.1 “REGIUS 170 PCB” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [PCB] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Backup Restore

[Exit]

•

Function Upload and save the data in REGIUS 170/190’s SCB (CF) onto the CS-2. Clicking “Console -> REGIUS170/190” will download the data stored in the controller onto the REGIUS 170/190’s SCB (CF). • Ticking “Program replacement for REGIUS170/190” when restoring the board data onto the REGIUS 190/170, a new format data will be restored. Exit the “Change Board” screen.

Data to be stored

• Shading data • Sensitivity correction data • PLL adjusting value • Start origin • Various setting data for network • Mechanical counter info.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 101

15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current]

15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current] 15.20.1 “Std. Current” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Std Current] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Reading Condition Image Size Standard Current Unevenness [Delete All Test]

[Execution] [Exit]

15 - 102

Function Select the resolution for dummy reading from the following. • “175µm(General Std)”, “87.5µm(Gen. H/Man. Std)”, “43.75µm(Mammo High)” Select the current value for dummy reading from the following. • “0nA”, “50nA”, “500nA”, “50000nA”, “All”. Select the unevenness correction for dummy reading from the following. • “ON”, “OFF”. 1) Clicking on this button will display a dialogue confirming the deletion of the dummy image. 2) Clicking “Yes” will delete only the dummy images at one time. Execute dummy reading with the standard current. Switches to “Reader” screen without implementing the dummy reading.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.]

15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.] 15.21.1 “Uniformity Corr.” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Uneven. Cal.] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Calibration Resolution PMT Barcode Registration [OK] Create Shipping Table (Factory use only) Result [Table Control] [Text File] [Exit]

•

Function Select from “175µm(General Std)”, “87.5µm(Gen. H/Mammo Std)” and “43.75µm(Mammo High)”. Use the default (2200) Use this function when the bar code registration is employed. Starts uniformity correction. Not to be used at the user. (do not tick the check). Displays the result of uniformity correction. Displays the information of uniformity calibration. Exports the result of uniformity calibration as a file. Exits the uniformity correction.

Correction data

10 tables of correction data for each of “87.5µm”, “175µm”, “Mammography” (totally 3 types) per Pv (plate version) can be registered. (total 30 tables) However, one table is for the use at the factory, in fact, there are 27 tables in total is available.

•

Plate size

For calibration purpose, use the largest size that is actually used at the facility. (except mammography use). For the sizes larger than the one used for calibration, the calibrated data is no more valid. As an example, the case where the calibration is made using Pv00 + 14” x 17”, Pv01 + 10” x 12” is described in the following table.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 103

15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.]

Read Plate Size

Plate Version

Calibration Data to be applied

8” x 10”

Pv01

Pv01+ 10” x 12”

14” x 17”

Pv01

Pv00 + 14” x 17”

10” x 12”

Pv00

Pv00 + 14” x 17”

• For mammography size, calibration can be done using a mammography cassette. (automatically recognized at the time of bar code reading)

•

Notes when implementing the uniformity calibration.

• Use the X-ray dose with bulb voltage 80kV, and mAs value to generates the signal value within the range of 1500 ~ 3000STEP. Distance between the plate and bulb should be 2m or more.

• When the optical unit is replaced, delete all of old calibration data table before starting the calibration.

15 - 104

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity]

15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity] 15.22.1 “Sensitivity Corr.” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Sensitivity] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Calibration Auto Create Resolution

Exposure Doxe Sensitive

Barcode Registration [OK] Create Shipping Table (Factory use only) Low sensitivity Standard sensitivity High sensitivity Result [Table Control] [Text File] [Exit]

Function Selecting this option enables to automatically create the calibration data for low resolution using calibration data for high resolution. When “Auto Create” is not selected, select the pixel size for sensitivity calibration. • For regular cassette, select from the standard (175µm) or high resolution mode (autocreate) (87.5µm). • For mammo, always select “High Res.” or “Mammo High Res”. Input the irradiation dose. • 8 ~ 20mR (10mR or higher is recommended) Input “0.94” for regular cassette, “0.91” for mammo cassette. • In “Auto Create” mode, sensitivity data for low resolution will be calculated using these settings.. Use only for “Bar Code Registration” is selected. Executes the sensitivity calibration. Not to be used at the user. (do not tick the check). QR value of the low sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 125) QR value of the normal sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 250) QR value of the high sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 500) Displays the result of uniformity correction.p Displays the correction data for the reader device. • Lists all history of calibrations with Plate version (Pv), size, cassette in the past. Exports the result of calibration result as a file. Exits the sensitivity correction.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 105

15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity]

•

Sensitivity calibration

• Regular (87.5µm, 175µm) or mammography/PCM cassette (87.5µm, 43.75µm) will be automatically recognized by reading the barcode on the cassette. • Selecting “Auto-Create Mode” will implement the calibration by reading at high resolution, and automatically create the sensitivity data for low resolution. (calibration completes with one exposure) • Use 14” x 17” film for regular (87.5µm, 175µµm) . (use the largest size that is actually used at the facility) • Standard Exposure Dose : 10mR or higher is recommended (use the exposure dose at which the x-ray irradiation becomes stable) • Because the mammo plates and PCM plates have low sensitivity compared to regular plates, input in the “PMT” of the “Sensitivity Correction” screen, the measured value x “α” so that it falls within the high valtage range of REGIUS 190/ 170.

•

Notes when implementing the sensitivity calibration of mammo cassette.

Because the sensitivity of the mammography plate is lower than the regular plate, calibration needs to be carried out following the procedures below in order to bring the sensitivity level to suit to the high voltage range of the REGIUS 190/170. • Expose the plate with 20 ~ 30mR of exposure dose at the plate surface. Input in the “PMT” of “Sensitivity Calib” screen the value calculated by actually measured X-ray dose multiplied by coefficient “α” when calibrating. • Use the same X-ray bulb as that for the regular plate. (tungsten bulb)

15 - 106

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs]

15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs] 15.23.1 “SubSystemLogs Create” Screen IMPORTANT: This screen is only useful to create the sub system logs on the REGIUS 190/170. Use the “Reader Logs”screen (REGIUS 190/170) to download the logs.

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Sub Logs]

Key/Item [SubSystemLog Create] [Exit]

Function Creates sub system logs on the REGIUS 190/170. Exits the “Sub Logs Create” screen.

• SubSystemLog is the log produced from the signal process firmware on the MCB2/MCB and SCB2/SCB of the REGIUS 190/170.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 107

15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs]

15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs] 15.24.1 Common Displays of “Reader Log Info.” Screen

Key/Item Reader Select Menu [Recv. Log] [Send Log] [Exit] [Cancel]

Function Select the reader device from which the log shall be collected. Receives the log from the reader device. Sends the settings to the reader device. Exit the “Reader Log Info.” screen after saving the setting. Exit the “Reader Log Info.” screen without saving the setting.

15.24.2 “Reader Log Info.” Screen IMPORTANT Implementing this function only will download the logs in the network application of the CSB2/SCB on the REGIUS 170/190. However, the created sub-system log is also downloaded when the sub-system log create is implemented in advance. (refer to xxxxxx) Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Reader Logs] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Reader Select [Reader Log] [Exit]

15 - 108

Function Select the REGIUS 170 from which the log shall be collected when there are several reader devices are connected. Acquires the logs from the REGIUS 170. Exits the reader logs.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade]

15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade] 15.25.1 “Install File” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [File Import]

Key/item [...] (reference key) [OK] [Cancel]

Function Select the holder where the install program resides. Normally select from “A” drive (floppy disk drive). The selected program will be decompressed. Exit the “Install File” screen after cancelling the selection of the file.

15.25.2 “Reader Program (change)” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Upgrade] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)

Key/Item Version The Current Installed [OK] [Cancel]

Function Indicates the program version which is currently running on the REGIUS 170. Version list of the reader device’s programs stored in the CS-2. The program selected here will be written in the reader device. Execute the switch over to the program version listed in the reader program version list. Exit the “Reader Program (change)” screen after cancelling the installation of program.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 109

15.26 [Reader] > [Network]

15.26 [Reader] > [Network] 15.26.1 “Network” screen Write the network information on the REGIUS 170 using this screen. Communicating with the REGIUS 170 in FTP mode when the screen starts, displays the obtained REGIUS 170 information. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Network] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen) Name of currently connected REGIUS 170

Key/Item Reader Host Name IP Address Netmask JM Host List Hosts Host List [New]

[Edit] [Delete] [Send] [Exit]

15 - 110

Function Input the host name of the REGIUS 170. (default: r170-0001) Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170. (default: 192.168.20.180) Input the subnet mask of the REGIUS 170. (default: 255.255.255.0) Input the name of JM which controls this REGIUS 170. Displays the host name and IP address of CS-2s which are connected to this REGIUS. Click this button when newly inputting the host name and IP address of the CS-2 which uses this REGIUS 170.

Click this button to change the host name or IP address of the CS-2 listed on the “Host” window Delete the CS-2 from the “Host” window. Send the displayed set up to the REGIUS 170 in FTP mode. Exit the “Network”. No change will be caused on the REGIUS 170.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log] 15.27.1

“System Setup File Save” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be used in the User Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [System]

Key/Item System Setup File Save System Setup File

[>], [>>]

Selected File for Save [<], [<<]

[Save] [Exit]

Function Displays the list of system setting files that can be saved. • In the User Tool, host setting/print setting/RIS setting/reader setting/ID card setting/ LUT/corr. data/Hosts files/Design files/patient DB/exam. DB are not displayed. [>] • • • Registers the items selected in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save” [>>] • • • Registers all items shown in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save” instantly by a single click. Displays the files which are registered to be saved. [<] • • • Excludes the files selected in “Selected File for Save” as non-saving items. [<<] • • • Excludes all items shown in the “Selected File for Save” as non-saving items instantly by a single click. Backs up the files in “Selected File for Save”onto the floppy disk. Exits the “System Setup File Save” screen.

IMPORTANT To maintain the conformity when executing a restore operation, select and save the following files always in pairs. “Stamp Setting 1 (stamp setting)” and “Stamp Setting 2 (style setting)”

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 111

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]

15.27.2

“Image File Save” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [Image]

Key/Item Save Option All

Cropping Image Image Header File selection field [Save] [Exit]

15 - 112

Function Check to select this option enables to backup all image data (image files, cropping images, image headers). • In the field for file selection, all image data will be listed. Check to select this option enables to backup cropping images (and image headers). • In the field for file selection, all cropping images will be listed. Check to select this option enables to backup all header files. • In the field for file selection, all header files will be listed. List of files specified by “Save Option” will be shown in this field. Click and select the files to be saved. Implements backup of the image files selected in the file selection field. Exits the “Image File Save” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]

15.27.3 Log Manager screen This screen is used to display and save the HIPAA log. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

This screen can be displayed regardless of the setting of the login management mode. Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [HIPAA Log]

Key/Item [Save]

[Display] [Delete] [Exit]

Function Saves the HIPAA log. • After saving, a confirmation screen appears asking whether to delete the HIPAA log. Click Yes to delete the HIPAA log; click No to not delete the HIPAA log. Displays the current HIPAA log contents. Deletes the HIPAA log. Exits the Log Manager screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 113

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]

15.27.4 “Log File Save” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [Log] Saves both basic logs and error logs. Specify the date for error logs.

Key/Item Error Log File List

Total [Save] [Exit]

15 - 114

Function Displays the log files stored on the CS-2 in order of date (starting from the oldest) Click to select the error log file in the list to be saved. • Clicking the files with <Shift> key depressed enables to select several files in series at a time. • Clicking the files with key depressed enables to individually select several files at a time. Displays the total Bytes of the files selected in the “Error Log File List” in “KByte”. Saves in the specified folder, “Basic Logs” and the logs selected in the list. Exits the “Log File Save” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image]

15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image] 15.28.1

“System Setup File Restore” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

A part of items can be used in the User Tool.

Display Procedure • • • [Restore] --> [System]

Key/Item Look in Folder Name [Browse. . .] System Setup File Restore System Setup File [>], [>>]

Selected File for Save [<], [<<]

[Restore] [Exit] Key/Item Look in

Function Input a folder name where a set up file to be restored exists. (default: A:) or click [Browse. . .] to display the folder name where the target file exists. Displays the dialogue in which you can specify the restore-origin folder. Displays the list of system set up files that are stored in the folders listed in “Look in”. Click to select the file in the list to be restored. [>] • • • Register the items selected in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save”. [>>] • • • Register all items shown in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save” instantly by a single click. Displays the files which are registered to be restored. [<] • • • Excludes the files selected in “Selected File for Save” as non-restore items. [<<] • • • Excludes all items shown in the “Selected File for Save” as non-restore items instantly by a single click. Clicking on this button while minimum 1 file exists in “Selected File for Save”, initiates restore. Exits the “Setup File Restore” screen. Function

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 115

15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image]

15.28.2

“Image File Restore” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Restore] --> [Image]

Key/Item Restore File Select Field

[Restore] [Exit] [Browse ...]

15 - 116

Function Displays a list of image files stored in the restore-origin folder (default: A:). Click to select the image file to be restored. • Clicking the files with <Shift> key depressed enables to select several files in series at a time. • Clicking the files with key depressed enables to individually select several files at a time. Click this button after selecting the image data you want to restore, from the image data list displayed on the screen. Exits the “Image File Restore” screen. Select the folder where exists the image data to be restored.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness] 15.29.1 “Brightness” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness]

Key/Item [1. Measurement of the display] [2. LUT making for the display] [Option Setting] [Exit]

Function Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • property measurement. Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • LUT creation. Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • option setting. Exits the “Display Calibration Tool” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 117

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

15.29.2 “Brightness • Prop. Measure” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [1. Measurement of the display]

•

Auto Mode Screen

This screen will be shown when the “Auto mode” is selected in Section 15.29.4, "“Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen".

Key/Item [Start]

[Cancel]

15 - 118

Function • Clicking on this button with the luminance meter connected automatically starts measurement. (refer to Section 12.6, "Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit". Exit the “Auto mode” screen without implementing the luminance measurement.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

•

Manual Mode Screen

This screen will be shown when the “Manual mode” is selected in Section 15.29.4, "“Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen".

Key/Item [NEXT (click after inputting the luminance)] Step Pixel Value [End] [Cancel]

Function Input the measurement value of the luminance meter. Brightness of the target increases as the button is clicked. Displays the luminance step of the target. Displays the pixel value of the target. Completes the measurement and exits the “Manual mode” screen. Cancels the brightness measurement, and exits the “Manual mode” screen without completing the measurement.

15.29.3 “Bright. Adjustment• LUT making for the display” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [2. Create Monitor LUT]

Key/Item Convert Method

Function Select the conversion method using a radio button.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 119

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

Key/Item GSDF conversion (input: P Value) Lightness linear conversion (input: P Value) Liner LUT [Convert/Save]]

[Exit]

Function Creates LUT using the GSDF conversion when the image pixels bear P value. Creates LUT using the lightness linear conversion.

Convert and save the monitor LUT obtained from the measurement. • Clicking on this button displays the dialogue, allowing you to set the output destination to which the LUT will be applied. • "Set Smooth" screen will be shown following the dialogue for setting the output destination when "Luminance Equiv. Conv." is selected. Exit the “LUT Making for Display” screen.

15.29.4 “Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [Option Setting]

Key/Item Method

Auto Mode

Manual Mode

Display Reflection Luminance Measurement Yes/No COM port Steps

15 - 120

Function Auto mode • • • Normally select this. Manual mode• • • Select this when the communication cannot established between the CS-2 and the luminance meter due to the reason such that a luminance meter other than specified is used. Communicating with the luminance meter, and automatically carry out the luminance measurement. • Normally select this. Input the measured luminance, and measure the monitor luminance manually. • Select this method in the case that the luminance meter cannot communicate with the CS-2 due to the incompatibility in communication, etc. Auto mode • • • Normally select this. Manual mode• • • Select this when the communication cannot established between the CS-2 and the luminance meter due to the reason such that a luminance meter other than specified is used. No fixed. Select the communication port from the following when required. • Always select “COM2”(fixed) with current version. Input the luminance steps of auto-measurement.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

Key/Item [Luminance meter check] [Exit]

Function Click this button to check the communication status of the luminance meter. Exits the “Option Setting” screen after saving the changes in setting.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 121

15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All]

15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All] 15.30.1 “Delete Image” Screen IMPORTANT Using the function of this screen, protected images are also deleted. Pay full attention when selecting the image to be deleted. Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Delete Image]

Key/Item Image Select List [Delete] [Exit]

15 - 122

Function Displays a list of images stored in the HDD. Click to select the file to be deleted in the list . The image selected in the “Image Select List” will be deleted. Clicking on this button displays a confirmation dialogue. Exits the “Image File Delete” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All]

15.30.2 “Delete All” Dialogue Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Delete All]

Key/Item [Yes] [No]

Function Deletes all image data stored in the HDD. Cancels the delete operation.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 123

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize] 15.31.1 “PostgreSQL access” Screen A launcher screen in the “PostgreSQL access” tool for engaging the CS-2 to the JM. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Configure]

15 - 124

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]

Key/Item c_status

r_status

Function The list of the CS-2(s) that are under control of the JM. Use this screen to delete or add the CS-2.

“c_stat” displays the current status of each CS-2 by numbers. 2: Power OFF 1: Reading 0: Ready -1: Error A list in which all REGIUS 170s under the control of the JM are shown. Use this screen to delete or add the REGIUS 170.

“r_stat” displays the current status of each REGIUS 170 by numbers. 3: Standby 2: Power OFF 1: Reading 0: Ready -1: Error

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 125

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]

Key/Item r_version

relations

Function Displays the firmware version, date of update of the REGIUS 170 that is controlled by the JM.

“version” displays the current firmware version of each REGIUS 170. “up_time” displays the date when the update was made to that version. A list in which all REGIUS 170s under the control of the JM are shown. Use this screen to delete or add the REGIUS 170.

“alert” displays the controls between the related CS-2 and REGIUS 170 by numbers. 1: Power control, transfer of error information. 0: Only power control. Error information will not be transferred.

15 - 126

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]

Key/Item sys_config

Function Displays the cassette registration method. Set the bar code registration or manual registration on this screen.

“reg_type” displays the cassette registration type by numbers. 1: Manual registration. 0: Bar code registration.

15.31.2 Back Up of JM Information Backs up the database set on the JM in the floppy disk. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Backup] Upon selecting this, back up will immediately start.

• When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the data base will be backed up onto the floppy disk and specific holder of the F drive.

• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up.

15.31.3 Restore of JM Information Restores the JM data base from the floppy disk (or F drive). Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Restore] Upon selecting this, restore will immediately start.

• When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the data base will be restored from the floppy disk.

• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 127

15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]

15.31.4 JM Log Save Collects and save the JM log in the floppy disk (and F drive). Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Log] Upon selecting this, saving will immediately start. • When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the log will be backed up onto the floppy disk and specific holder of the F drive.

• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up

15.31.5 JM Initialize Initialize the JM data base, and restores the initial condition as it was when delivered. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Initialize] Upon selecting this, initialization will immediately start.

• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up.

15 - 128

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping]

15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping] 15.32.1 “Network Diagnosis” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Ping]

Key/Item Device Service Host Name IP Address [Ping] [Exit] Status

Function Select the device that should be diagnosed. Select the socket of the device to be diagnosed. • Necessary to select the socket if hosts or printers are selected as the external device. Display the host name of the selected external device. Display the IP address of the selected external device. Displays the result of Ping. • If an error occurs on the network, the error contents will be shown. Exits the "Network Diagnosis” screen. Function

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 129

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool) 15.33.1 “Mainte” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(4) Key/Item (1) Menu File (F) Display (V) Analyze (A) Measure (M) Help (H) (2) Cursor Line* (3) Selecting Rectangular*

(4) Mouse Position*

(5) Scroll Bar

*

Function Reads the image file, prints the image, etc. Sets the contrast, changes the image size, depicts and deletes the grid lines. Displays the histogram of the image data, horizontal and vertical profiles. Measures the MTF of the image data, S-sensitivity, unevenness correction. Displays the version information. Indicate the current cursor position by means of lines. Displays the rectangular that will select the information area on the histogram, horizontal and vertical profile. • While the cursor line is displayed, drag the mouse with the mouse’s right button being pressed to change size and position of the rectangular. Mouse’s current position is indicated by X, Y- axis. During the mouse being dragged, origin of axis is shown on the left, and the current axis of the cursor position is shown on the right. The scroll bar will be displayed when the image cannot be displayed within the main image frame. • This bar is interlocked with the scroll bar of the horizontal and vertical profile.

They will not be displayed when there is no cursor on the main image frame, or when there is no dialogue for histograms or horizontal and vertical profile is shown.

15 - 130

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

•

File (F)

Menu Item Open (O) Save as BMP file (A)... Save a portions as IMG file Print (P)... Print Preview (V) Printer Setup (R)... Exit (X)

•

Function Displays the file selection dialogue, and displays the selected file. Displays the holder selection dialogue, and save the currently displayed image in BMP file format. Select the area on the image, and save the image within this area. Displays the print dialogue, and prints the current status that is shown on the desk top. Displays the printed image. Displays the printer Info. dialogue, and changes the printer properties. Exit from the Exam. Tool.

Display (V)

• The submenu can only be selected when an image file is open.

Menu Item Density / Contrast (C) Display Size (V) 1/1 Image (N) 1/2 Image (H) All Image (A) Grid (G) Draw (D) Clear (C) remove cross-scan unevenness Key Area Key Area (G)

Status Bar (S)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Function Displays the “Den.• Cont. Setting” screen. Displays the image data by 1 to 1. Displays the image data by 1 to 2. Displays the whole image by applying appropriate skipping ratio. Displays the grid lines (100 pixels/scale) Erase the currently displayed grid lines. Displays screens after performing Vertical Scanning Unevenness Correction. Displays the Key Area. Applying “G” processing to the displayed image according to the parameteres contained in the additional information for exposure, and opens the “ROI” screen. Switches the display of mouse position ON/OFF

15 - 131

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

•

Analysis (A)

• Selectable only when an image file is displayed.

Menu Item Histogram (H) Profile (Horizontal) (S) Profile (vertical) (V)

•

Function Displays the histogram dialogue. Displays the horizontal profile dialogue. Displays the vertical profile dialogue.

Measure (M)

• Selectable only when an image file is displayed.

Menu Item MTF Measurement... (M) S Measurement of S Sensitivity... (S) Measure unevenness after calibrate (H)

Function Displays the MTF measurement screen. Displays the S-sensitivity measurement screen. Displays the unevenness measurement screen after the correction.

15.33.2 “Contrast” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Display (V)] --> “Density / Contrast (C)”

Key/Item Black: White: Center:

Function Allows the input of max. signal value and its display. • Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 4095) Allows the input of min. signal value and its display. • Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 4095) Allows the input of med. signal value and its display. • Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 4095)

• Setting the min. signal value > max. signal value will reverse the B&W of the image.

15 - 132

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.3 “ROI” Screen Displays the specified part of the image by applying a color. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Display (V)] --> “Key Area”

Key/Item Interested Color

Function Specify the density which you want to display in color. • Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 4095) Specify the surrounding border with the Key Area in center. • Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 255)

15.33.4 “Histogram” Screen Displays the frequency distribution of the area selected by the rectangular on “Main” screen. Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Analysis] --> “Histogram (H)”

Display Min: Max: Ave: S.D.: Mid: Histogram

Function Displays the min. signal value within the rectangular. Displays the max. signal value within the rectangular. Displays the ave. signal value within the rectangular. Displays the standard deviation within the rectangular. Displays the median within the rectangular. Displays the histogram by assuming the most popular signal value within the rectangular as “1”.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 133

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.5 “Hor. & Ver. Profile” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Analysis (A)] --> “Profile (Horizontal) (S)” or “Profile (Vertical) (V)” (1) (2) (1)

(5)

(3)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(1) (2)

Key/Item Profile Data Cursor Line

(3)

Selecting Rectangular

(4) (5)

Scroll Bar Mouse Position

(6)

Max./min. Signal Value

(7)

Select Rectangular Start/ End

15 - 134

(7)

Function Displays the average profile of the line selected on the main image. Displays the lines corresponding to axis where the current position of the cursor locates. Selecting any part of the profile information will allow you to find the min. and max. signal value within the selected area. Selecting procedures are same as that for the main image. Scrolls the profile info. display. This bar is interlocked with the one for the main image. Displays the mouse position when it is being dragged. Upper • • • Displays the origin of the rectangular. Lower • • • Displays the current position of the cursor. Min. • • • Displays the minimum signal value within the rectangular. Max. • • • Displays the maximum signal value within the rectangular. Upper • • • Displays the start point line of the rectangular. Lower • • • Displays the end point line of the rectangular.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.6 “MTF Measurement” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Measure (M)] --> “MTF Measurement (M)”

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) (2) (3)

Key/Item Max. Signal Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm Min. Signal Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm [Execute]

(4) (5)

[Clear] MTF Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm

•

Function Displays the maximum signal value for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm each. Displays the minimum signal value for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm each. Clicking on this button while both maximum and minimum signal values are displayed will initiate the MTF measurement. Clears the displayed or input items. Displays the MTF measurement for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm.

Measuring Method of 0 lp/mm Data

Display the histogram screen, then click the input box for 0 lp/mm of the MTF measurement screen. After confirming that the cursor ( | ) is displayed in the box, select the max. and min. measurement area for 0 lp/mm on the main image. As the area is selected, its average value will be shown in the input area.

•

Measuring Method of 0.5 ~ 2.0 lp/mm

Display the horizontal • vertical profile screen, then click the input box for 0.5 lp/mm of the MTF measurement screen. After confirming that the cursor ( | ) is displayed in the box, select the max. and min. measurement area for 0.5 ~ 2.0 lp/mm on the main image. As the area is selected, its average value will be shown in the input area.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 135

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.7 “Measure: S Sensitivity Measure” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Measure (M)] --> “S-Sen. Measure (S)”

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6) (7) (8)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Key/Item S Value Line Val [mR] Measure Area [Except Img] [Execute] [Clear] S Sensitive... Ave S Val Static

15 - 136

Function Select the S-value from 25, 100, 200, 400, 800. Input the X-ray dose. Input the pixels for each side (up/down, R/L), which should be excluded from the measuring area Execute the S-sensitivity measurement. Clear the items displayed or input. Displays the measured S-sensitivity. Displays the measured average signal value • standard deviation. Displays “Calculating” during measurement, and “reference value” after the measurement.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.8 “Measure: Corrected Mural Measure” Screen Start up from the system menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze/Diagnosis] → [Image] → "Measure (M)" → "Measure unevenness after Calibrate (H)"

(1)

(3)

(2) (4)

(5) (6)

(1)

Key/Item Measure area [pixel out]

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

[Execute] [Clear] Ave Signal Val: Variance Static

Function Input the pixels for each side (up/down, R/L), which should be excluded from the measuring area Execute the S-sensitivity measurement. Clear the items displayed or input. Displays the measured average signal value. Displays the measured distribution. Displays “Calculating” during measurement, and “measured result” after the measurement.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 137

15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log]

15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log] 15.34.1 “Application Log” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [App Log]

Key/Item [Open] [Search] [CSV File] Log File List [Exit]

15 - 138

Function Select the date of the log that you want to display. • Displays the read list dialogue on which the dates and logs are listed. Clicking on this button will display a dialogue for setting the term within which the logs are collected. • Displays the search screen Outputs the collected logs in CSV file format. Displays the list of logs which are screened by date or other conditions. Exits the “Application Log” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log]

15.34.2 “Search” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [App Log] --> [Search]

Key/Item Period Period Start/End

Function Set the time range in which the events occurred and to be displayed. Check “Period”, and set the time range for the events. Set the start and end time for specific event.

Device Processing Device Description Description Character Strings Operation Log Operation Log [OK] [Cancel]

Displays the events of specific device. Check “Device”, and select the device for which the events shall be displayed. Check the device name for which the event shall be displayed. Displays the event which has an specific character strings in the message. Check “Description”, and input the character string to be searched. Input the character string to be searched. Check to displays the work log only. Exits the “Search Option” screen after completing the search. The events searched with the specific condition will be shown in the application log field. Exit the “Search Option” screen without completing the search.

• When several search conditions are set, only the event that satisfies the all search condition will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15 - 139

15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log]

15.34.3 “System Log Info.” Screen Start up from the sytem menu

Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Sys Log]

Key/Item “System Log Select” Menu

Log List Field [Reset] [CSV File] [Exit]

15 - 140

Function Select the log type from below, which categorizes the logs created during the exposure. Reader1 Read Info. • • • Displays the total cassette read on each reader device. Reader1 Counter2 • • • Displays the total image cont that has been read in the past. Edit Image Counter • • • Displays the image count that has been changed in processing method. Image Output Counter • • • Displays the already output count for each output destination. Error Counter • • • Displays the error occurred on the CS-2 in the past with classification according to the error contents. Displays the list of information that is selected in the system log select menu. Set the count such as sheet count to “0”. • Clicking on this button displays a confirming dialogue. Outputs the event logs displayed on the event logs details column in CSV file format. Exits the “SystemLog Info.” screen.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16

Appendix This section describes technical information that can be helpful for the installation work and installation procedures for the optional wall type operation unit.

This page intentionally left blank.

16.1 List of Differences

16.1 List of Differences Differences (Service Tool, functions) between CS-1 and CS-2 are as follows.

16.1.1 Service Tool

Console

Console Input/ Output

Overlay Exposure Option

Program

System

Reader

Calibration

Log

Program

System Info Job Manager Printer Host RIS

CS-2 System Screen Display Patient Display Routine Display Reservation List Portable Examination History

Patient/Study Result

Marker Stamp Exam. Tag Processing Parameter Gateway 680X Patient OB Patient DB Registration Patient DB Output License Install Program Reader REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550 System Setup REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550 PCB Change REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550 Reference REGIUS170 Current REGIUS350/550 Unevenness REGIUS170 Correction REGIUS350/550 Sensitivity REGIUS170 Correction REGIUS350/550 SubSystemLog REGIUS170 s Create REGIUS350/550 Reader REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550 Install REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550 Program REGIUS170 REGIUS350/550

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Screen Setting

Input/Output

Con sole Overlay Exposure Option

Program

System

Calibration

Log Program REGIUS170

Italic

全般 Screen Registration Examination Result Examination List Image Confirmation Examination History

System Info Job Manager Printer Host RIS Patient/Study Result Density (altered from “Marker”) Stamp Exam. Tag Processing Parameter Gateway

Patient OB

Reader

CS-1/CS-3 Screen Settings System Date/Time Network Screen Setting

Patient DB Registration Patient DB Output

License Install Program

Reader System Setup PCB Change Reference Current Unevenness Correction Sensitivity Correction SubSystemLogs Create Reader Log Install Program Network

REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170 REGIUS170

: Deleted tool : Changed tool

16-1

System

System

Image

Image

Log

HIPAA log

Backup

Backup

16.1 List of Differences

System

System

Image

Image

Log

HIPAA log Log

Restore

System

Image

Image

Touch Panel

Screen

Brightness Adjustment

Brightness Adjustment

Image

Deletion of Image

Deletion of Image

System

Deletion of All Data

Job Manager

Setting

System

Image

Image

Screen Image Adjustment

System

System

System

Deletion of All Data

Job Manager

Setting Backup

Adjustment

Restore

Log

Backup Restore

Restore

Log Collection

Log Collection

Initialization

PDA

PDA Tool

Network

Ping

Image

WS

Backup

Initialization

Image

Network

Ping

Image

Image

Log

Application Log System Log

MTF Log

Application Log System Log

REGIUS350/550

Italic

: Deleted tool : Changed tool

Self-DiagnosisÇP

Console > System > Date/Time

Use User Utility > System Info. Edit Screen > Change date/time

Console > System > Network

Use WindowsXP > Control Panel > Property of local area connection.

Adjustment > Screen > Touch Panel

Use WindowsXP > Control Panel > TouchWare.

16-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16.1 List of Differences

16.1.2 Function Function Comparison between CS-2 and CS-1 Function

CS-2

CS-1/CS-3

DICOM DETACHED

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

DICOM MWM

Yes

Yes

DICOM MPPS

Yes

Yes

Special Protocol

Yes

Yes

Screen Keyboard Keyboard Local Disk Patient DB External Patient/ Exam DB

Order Registration

Standard Backup

Number of registered examinations Number of exposures per exam Exposure Exam. Tag

Quantity

No limit 128 REGIUS 170 x 2 REGIUS 350 REGIUS 550 REGIUS 170

Connected Leader

Cassette registration method

Image Read

Size

Sampling pitch

QR value

Job Manager

32 items － － Yes No. of units that can be connected: 2 No

REGIUS 550

No

Post-registration Auto-registration Pre-registration 8 x 10 inch 10 x 12 inch 11 x 14 inch 14 x 14 inch 14 x 17 inch 17X17 18X24 Mammography 24X30 Mammography 18X24 24x30 15x30 175µm 87.5µm

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

43.75µm

Yes

Low sensitivity 125

Yes

Yes

Standard sensitivity 250

Yes

Yes

High sensitivity 500

Yes

Yes

No Yes Yes Yes No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

－ No

－ Yes

Condition Setting Result Acquisition X-ray Generator Condition Setting Mammography model Result Acquisition General model

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Option When multiple orders are found because of search condition, only 300 items from the beginning are valid. Special protocol ⇔ DICOM conversion is performed by the other maker linkage module (ID-680SAN).

No limit 32 (to V2.00R02) 128 (from V2.00R03) Approx 1000 items Approx. 800 items Approx. 800 items Yes No. of units that can be connected: 16 Yes No. of units that can be connected: 1 Yes No. of units that can be connected:1 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No (CS-1) Yes (CS-3)

REGIUS 350

PCM Console built-in Special Backup function

Remarks 　

Option, overseas only Can be changed wit in the range of low sensitivity 125 ≦ QR ＜ 250 Can be changed within the range of high sensitivity 250 ＜ QR ≦ 500

16-3

16.1 List of Differences

Function Subject recognition Processing Auto-gradation processing Adjustment

S value G value ROI E processing

Routine Image Procesing Image emphasis

F processing

H processing Blackening of out of irradition field Name Annoation Marker Scale Configuration (no. of units that can be connected） Protocol

Printer Output Format

Standard printer 1 Standard printer 2 Backup printer DICOM BASIC PRINT DICOM presented LUT 1 frame 1 image processin g 2 frames 2 images 2 frames 4 frames Direct output Entire output

Trimming Position Fine Adjustment Standard HOST １

HOST Output

Image processing Image processing parameter adjustment Examination History

Configuration Standard HOST ２ （Number of units that Standard HOST ３ ca be connected） Backup HOST DICOM CR image STORAGE DICOM DX image image STORAGE DICOM MG image Protocol STORAGE DICOM storage consignment DICOM GSPS G processing E processing F processing H processing Manual adjustment （User tool） Method Auto Learning Number of past examination saved User Management

HIPAA Log Management Remote Maintenance

16-4

CS-2

CS-1/CS-3

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes No Yes Cannot be changed from Exam. Tag setting Yes Cannot be changed from Exam. Tag setting Yes Cannot be changed from Exam. Tag setting Yes Processing OFF/ON only Yes Printer, HOST common 1 patterns No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

Yes

No limit User registration/ Deletion Login/Logoff Log output Log display/Save/Delte

Yes Yes Yes Yes Processing OFF/ON, Parameter adjustment Yes Processing OFF/ON, Parameter adjustment Yes Processing OFF/ON, Parameter adjustment Yes Processing OFF/ON, shape adjustment Yes Printer, HOST 5 patterns each Yes Yes Yes The standard software (overseas) proYes vides only 1 channel, either printer or HOST and the 2nd channel is optional. Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Remarks 　

No exposure Exam. Tag is provided and the format set in the image confirmation sreen is followed. The format is kept until the user change it.

The standard software (overseas) provides only 1 channel, either printer or HOST and the 2nd channel is optional.

No No limit

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Depends on HDD capacity

Domestic specification

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16.1 List of Differences Function

Option

Portable mode MWM/FTP/DETATCH MPPS/DETATCH HQ Mammography DICOM Output Additional #1 DICOM Output Additional #2 DICOM Output Package Stitching Image Sharing Data Analysis

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

CS-2

CS-1/CS-3

No Yes Yes Yes

Yes (CS-3) Yes (CS-3) Yes (CS-3) Yes (CS-3)

Yes

Yes (CS-3)

Yes

Yes (CS-3)

Yes

Yes (CS-3)

Yes Yes Yes

Yes (CS-3) Yes Yes

Remarks 　

16-5

16.2 Stamp Item Selection List

16.2 Stamp Item Selection List The Exam Tag Conversion table is comprised of the following data. ITEM

Study Date Image Date Study Time Image Time Accession Number Institution Name Institution Address Referring Physician Station Name Department Name Recording Physician Performing Physician Reading Study Phys. Operator's Name DiagnosesDescription Model Name Patient's Name Patient ID Patient's Birth Date Patient's Birth Time Patient's Sex Other Patient ID Other Patient Names Patient's Age Patient's Height Patient's Weight Medical Alerts Contrast Allergies Ethnic Group Occupation Add. Patient History Pregnancy Status Patient Comments Contrast/Bolus Agent Body Part Examined KVP Serial Number Software Versions C/B Route C/B Volume(cm3) C/B Start Time

16-6

Selectable Display Form (refer to the table in the right)

B B C C A A A D A A D D D D A A D A B C A A D E A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A C

ITEM

X-ray Tube Current Exposure Rectification Type Image Area Dose Prod Filter Type Pixel Spacing-Row Pixel Spacing-Col Grid Focal Spot Anode Material Breast Thickness Pressure Phosphor Type Cassette Orientation Read Size Detector Primary Angle View Position Sensitivity Detector ID Grid Absorb.Material Grid SpacingMaterial Grid Thickness Grid Pitch Grid AspectRatio-V Grid AspectRatio-H Grid Focal Distance Filter Material Filter Thickness Min Filter Thickness Max Exposure Ctrl Mode Exposure Status Study Instance UID Series Instance UID Study ID Series Number Instance ID Pat. Orientation-1st Pat. Orientation-2nd Laterality Image Laterality Other Study ID

Selectable Display Form (refer to the table in the right)

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A _ A A A A A A A A

A (Undefined) Convert to Hex 2-byte Character Divide 100 Decimal down 2 OFF/ON Yes/No Marker Position Sex Entry No Sex Entry B "Date(JP-YYYY)" "Date(JP-YY)" "Date(JP-JP)" "Date(US-YYYY)" "Date(US-YY)" "Date(US-JP)" C "Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)" "Time(JP-HH+MM)" "Time(US-HH+MM+SS)" "Time(US-HH+MM)" D Personal name alphabet E "Age(old)"

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16.2 Stamp Item Selection List

ITEM

C/B Stop Time C/B Total Dose Field of View-Col Mag. Factor (x100) Field of View Shape Field of View-Row Source-Patient [mm] Reason for Study Requesting Physician Requesting Service Study Comments Special Needs Cur. Patient Location Pat. Residence(Ward) Patient State Total Exposure Dur. Total Exposure Num. Exposure Time Entrance Dose Exposed Area Source-Entrance [mm] Radiation Comments Transport Arrange. Recipients of Result Placer Order Number Filler Order Number Inc. Plane Dose(mGy) Pat.Confidentiality Medium Type Film Size ID Number of Films Set Exam Tag Num Set Page Name Set Group Name Set Tag Name User Exam Tag Num User Page Name User Group Name User Tag Name XrayCtrlCode Tube Num AEC Position Guard Rows Columns

ITEM

Selectable Display Form (refer to the table in the right)

C

A A A A A D A A A A A A A _ A A A _ _ D _ _ A A _ _ _ A A A A A A A A A A _ A A A

Image Comment Num. of Image Contrast Flow Rate Contrast Flow Dur. C/B Ingredient C/B Concentration QC Image Study Priority Sched.StudyStartDate Sched.StudyStartTime Refer. Pending Study Pending Host Pending Output Device Img Confirm mode Source-Detector [mm] Input Distinguish Img Confirm screen Internal Img No. Mag.mode(integer) Mag.mode(float) ExamTag Group ExamTag Name LUT Name DL(G-Process) DH(G-Process) S-Value G-Value Shift Rotate E ON/OFF F ON/OFF E bl E bh E MaskSize F b1 F b2 F MaskSize H ID (HE or HF) HF-STANDARD HE-STANDARD HF-b2 HF-b1 HE-bh HE-bl

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Selectable Display Form (refer to the table in the right)

A _ A A A A A A B C A A A A A A A

A (Undefined)

A _ _ A A _ _ A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

C "Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)"

Convert to Hex 2-byte Character Divide 100 Decimal down 2 OFF/ON Yes/No Marker Position Sex Entry No Sex Entry B "Date(JP-YYYY)" "Date(JP-YY)" "Date(JP-JP)" "Date(US-YYYY)" "Date(US-YY)" "Date(US-JP)"

"Time(JP-HH+MM)" "Time(US-HH+MM+SS)" "Time(US-HH+MM)" D Personal name alphabet E "Age(old)"

16-7

16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table

16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table Structure of Exam Tag Conversion Table

Exam Tag Conversion table is comprised of the following data. Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4...

The data in each row implies the following depending on the type selected by “Convert Source Code” of “Exam Tag” on “RIS INFO (Modality Worklist)” screen. “Reserved Code System” 1st Row

(0040,0100) Reserved Process Step Sequence >(0040,0008) Reserved Implement Item Code Sequence >>(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor

2nd Row

(0040,0100) Reserved Process Step Sequence >(0040,0008) Reserved Implement Item Code Sequence >>(0008,0100) Code Value

3rd Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

4th Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

:

:

“Requested Code System” 1st Row

(0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence >(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor

2nd Row

(0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence >(0008,0100) Code Value

3rd Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

4th Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

1st Row

(0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence >(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor

“Requested ID, Description” 1st Row

(0040,1001) Requested Process ID

2nd Row

(0032,1060) Requested Process Descriptor

3rd Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

4th Row

CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.

:

:

CS-2 searches the line whose 1st and 2nd row are respectively identical to those of the “Code Type” and “Body Part Code” sent from RIS, and converts the 3rd row below into the CS-2 exam tag Serial No. only when they are identical.

• One RIS Body Code can be converted into 1 ~ 32 (max) exam. tag keys of CS-2.

16-8

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table

How to Create the Conversion Table

1.

Conversion table can be created using text editor of Windows or Microsoft Excel. In the following, procedures using the text editor is detailed. Input the code system descriptor and body part code value sent from RIS, and corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. being separated by comma in one line. Example: When the code system descriptor is “KCCODE”, and the code value corresponding to the Chest AP is “100”, input the data in a line as follows. KCCODE,100,

• Always use 1 byte alphabet or digit to input.

2.

Input the corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. in the 3rd row. Example: KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000

3.

Repeat the step 1 through 2 for all body part codes of RIS to input corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. Example: KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000 KCCODE,200,10100100100020000000 KCCODE,300,10100100100030000000

• When the body part code of RIS has several body parts, input the corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. in the 4th row separating from the 3rd row with comma.

• Maximum 32 CS-2 Exam Tag Serial Nos can be corresponded to one body part code. Example: KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000 KCCODE,200,10100100100020000000 KCCODE,300,10100100100030000000,1010010010040000000,• •

4. 5.

Save the created data with an file extension of “.csv” in the super disk. Click [Konica REGIUS] on the CS-2 routine screen to open “Service Tool (Console)” screen.

6. 7.

Click “RIS” of “Input/Output” to open “RIS INFO (Patient/Study)”. Select [Modality Worklist (MWM)] in “Service Class” of “RIS INFO (Command)” screen, then select “Modality Worklist (MWM)” in the left menu. “RIS INFO (Modality Worklist (MWM)” screen will be shown.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

16-9

16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table

8.

9.

Set each item of “Exam Tag” as follows. Item to be set

Setting

Convert Table

DICOM (1 to 1)

Convert Source Code

Scheduled Code

Ignore 1st Value

OFF (no check)

Ignore 2nd Value

OFF (no check)

Click [Excel File]. “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen will be shown.

10.

Click [Browse. . . ] of “CSV File -> Exam Tag”. “Open” dialogue will be shown.

11.

Select the file name saved in the step 4, then click [Open]. Selected file name will be shown in “CSV File -> Exam Tag” of “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen.

12.

Click [Import]. The file will be loaded, and the new conversion table will be created in the CS-2.

13.

Click [YES] of confirmation dialogue for process completion, then click [Exit] of “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen. Screen switches to “Service Tool (Console)” screen.

16-10

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

0801-55030 C

0502TE